65% Project Manual - Facilities & Servicesfacilities.nmsu.edu/wp-content/uploads/sites/57/...65%...

New Mexico State University REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL (RFP)

RFP # __________-P

65% Project Manual

DONA ANA COMMUNITY COLLEGE MAIN CAMPUS

BUILDING 341 RENOVATIONS of CLASSROOMS & LABORATORIES

20 November 2015

PROJECT MANAGER: Leo Lucero at 575-646-5351 E-MAIL: [email protected]

LOCATION: New Mexico State University

DACC CENTRAL CAMPUS RENOVATIONS OF CLASSROOMS & LABORATORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 Metal Fabrications 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07420 Metal Window Panels 07543 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07720 Roof Accessories 07840 Firestopping Penetrations and Joints 07920 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08311 Access Doors and Frames 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors and Grilles 08620 Unit Skylights 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09111 Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing 09220 Portland Cement Plaster 09250 Gypsum Board 09310 Ceramic Tile 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09521 Acoustical Wall Panels 09650 Resilient Flooring 09681 Carpet Tile 09840 Cementitious Wood Fiber Wall Panels


TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2

09911 Exterior Painting 09912 Interior Painting 09961 Abrasion Resistant Coatings DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 Toilet Compartments 10400 Signage 10522 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 10523 Fire Extinguishers 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 115213 Projection Screens DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Applicable DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 144119 Stairwall Chair Lifts


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. SUMMARY 1. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,

placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit MR 5: For products using regional materials, documentation indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

C. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, curing compounds, and others as requested by Architect.

D. Shop drawings for reinforcement, prepared by registered Professional Engineer for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.

F. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

G. Mockups:

1. Provide mockups of colored architectural concrete to be used for designated walls.



(1) Size: Mockup samples shall be 4 feet wide by 4 feet high by 8 inches thick.

2. Provide sample finishes as directed by Architect for Apparatus Bay area floor.

(1) Size: Mockup samples shall be 24 inches by 24 inches minimum.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."

2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice."

B. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of

work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Earth forms are allowed for footings.

C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum

VOC of 350 mg/l that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in

concrete surface.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.



D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,

and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material

will not support chair legs.

2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2).

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F.

C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a

single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-

causing deleterious substances. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service

have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect.

D. Water: Drinkable.

E. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent

chloride ions.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Air-Tite," Cormix. (2) "Air-Mix" or "Perma-Air," Euclid Chemical Co. (3) "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co. (4) "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air," Master Builders, Inc. (5) "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc. (6) "Sika AER," Sika Corp.

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.



1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp. (2) "PSI N," Cormix. (3) "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co. (4) "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co. (5) "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc. (6) "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries. (7) "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp.

H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be


(1) "Super P," Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. (2) "PSI Super," Cormix. (3) "Eucon 37," Euclid Chemical Co. (4) "WRDA 19" or "Daracem," W.R. Grace & Co. (5) "Rheobuild," Master Builders, Inc. (6) "PSP," Prokrete Industries. (7) "Sikament 300," Sika Corp.

I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.



(1) "Q-Set," Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. (2) "Gilco Accelerator," Cormix. (3) "Accelguard 80," Euclid Chemical Co. (4) "Daraset," W.R. Grace & Co. (5) "Hydraset-Free," W.R. Meadows, Inc. (6) "Pozzutec 20," Master Builders, Inc.

J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.



(1) "PSI-R Plus," Cormix. (2) "Eucon Retarder 75," Euclid Chemical Co. (3) "Daratard-17," W.R. Grace & Co. (4) "Evapre," W.R. Meadows, Inc. (5) "Pozzolith R," Master Builders, Inc. (6) "Protard," Prokrete Industries. (7) "Plastiment," Sika Corporation.

K. Color pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-

reducing admixtures: color stable, non-fading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.



L. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M, except free of wash water from mixer

washout operations.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper.

2. Polyethylene film.

3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

C. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane forming curing

compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be


(1) "A-H 3 Way Sealer," Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. (2) "Spartan-Cote," The Burke Co. (3) "Conspec #1," Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. (4) "Hardtop," Cormix. (5) "Day-Chem Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. (6) "Eucocure," Euclid Chemical Co. (7) "Horn Clear Seal," A.C. Horn, Inc. (8) "L&M Cure," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. (9) "Masterkure," Master Builders, Inc. (10) "CS-309," W.R. Meadows, Inc. (11) "LR-151," Prokrete Industries. (12) "Kure-N-Seal," Sonneborn-Rexnord. (13) "Stontop CS2," Stonhard, Inc.

D. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.


incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) "Highseal," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. (2) "Safe Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. (3) "Aqua-Cure," Euclid Chemical Co. (4) "Dress & Seal #18WB," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. (5) "Masterseal W," Master Builders, Inc. (6) "Intex," W.R. Meadows, Inc. (7) "Sika Membrane," Sika Corp.



2. Verify compatibility with floor finishes for interior concrete slabs.

E. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be


(1) "Aquafilm," Ardex, Inc. (2) "Eucobar," Euclid Chemical Co. (3) "E-Con," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. (4) "Confilm," Master Builders, Inc. (5) "Vocomp-20," W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing. 1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by weight.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15

days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.46 maximum

D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability.

B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C).

C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50.



D. Use air-entraining admixture in all exterior concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits:

(1) 6.0 percent 3/4-inch to 1-1/2-inch max. aggregate.

E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's

directions. F. Color pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer’s written

instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mock-up.

G. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.

2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches.

3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (Superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after

addition of HRWR to site-verified 2-inch to 3-inch slump concrete.

4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce

mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,

location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.



C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and

concreting operations.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,

space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.4 JOINTS



A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.

C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting- type screeds.

3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES

A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed.

B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified.

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-

spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309.



2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within

limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement.

F. Cold-Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete

work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

H. Hot-Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and

strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel

temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed.

4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,

or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect.



3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture

of acrylic or styrene butadiene- based bonding admixture and water to consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.

2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes.

Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready

for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of Ff 18 - Fl 15. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab

surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final

troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.



Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of Ff 20 - Fl 17. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

C. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set

mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming.

D. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated including “Level 2” finish in the Apparatus Bay area as shown on the drawings. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-

bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 2. Mockups of required final finish to be approved by Architect before application.

3.10 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.

D. Provide moisture curing by following methods. 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.

2. Use continuous water-fog spray.

3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with

water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

E. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:

1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest

practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

F. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and

curbs as follows: 1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing

operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared).



Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish

materials applied directly to concrete.

G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method.

I. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-

retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.

C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.

3.12 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form- coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.

3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.



B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams

where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect.

B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush- coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried.

C. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that,

when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

D. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects

cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

E. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability

of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.

F. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required slope.

G. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

H. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

I. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.

J. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around.



Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

K. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry-pack before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.

L. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.

M. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following,

as directed by Architect.

C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete;

ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below,

when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made.

4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each

compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.

5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds.

plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

6. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of

concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.



7. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., Architect may

waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three

consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer,

and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test

results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified.

END OF SECTION 03 3000


UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 - 1

SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Mortar and grout materials.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

C. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.




A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Coordinate installation with Owner’s special inspector.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for sills, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Density Classification: Normal weight, see Drawings.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout[, and cement shall be extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.



B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Water: Potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Truss type with single pair of side rods.

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.



2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

C. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

2. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents.

2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.



2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S or Type N. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M. 4. Color: Provide colored grout for use with exposed colored CMU. Architect to select color

from manufacturer’s full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.



C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.



C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide movement-type control joints at both sides of openings and no more than thirty feet on center in straight walls.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints flush (at smooth block) when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings. 4. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.



3.6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

B. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

D. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.



2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. Refer to Section 01 7419, “Construction Waste Management.”



METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1

SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Miscellaneous steel framing, trim, outriggers and supports. 2. Shelf and relieving angles. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles. 5. Steel gate frames. 6. Metal bollards. 7. Pipe guards. 8. Bicycle racks. 9. Loose steel lintels. 10. Metal Ladders. 11. Tree Grates. 12. Wrought iron gates. 13. Corner Guards.

B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs.

C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube railings.

D. See Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for aluminum railing systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Metal nosings and treads. 2. Grout.

B. LEED Submittal:






C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

D. Samples: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

B. Ferrous Metals:

1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 3. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276. 4. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36

or ASTM A 283, Grade C or D. 5. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is

indicated or required by structural loads. 7. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels complying with MFMA-3, 1-5/8

by 1-5/8 inches. Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.079-inch (2-mm) nominal thickness.

8. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

C. Nonferrous Metals:

1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. 2. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632, alloy 6061-T6. 3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.



2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79.

B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Available Products:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended.



3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches o.c.

B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

C. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in concrete walls and partitions at locations indicated.

D. Shelf and Relieving Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c.

1. Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: Galvanize.

E. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts.

F. Metal Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Steel Ladder Construction: Flat bar siderails, with 3/4-inch- diameter steel bar rungs

fitted in centerline of siderails, plug-welded, and ground smooth on outer rail faces. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.

G. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Galvanize.

H. Safety stair nosings: Provide extruded aluminum units with abrasive fillers (burgundy color), 3" wide by stair width less 6", American Safety Tread, model #3511. Other acceptable manufacturers include:

1. Balco, Inc. 2. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. 3. Safety Metal Co., Inc.

I. Corner Guards: Pre-fabricated from Type 430, 16 GA. stainless steel. Provide IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, (800)222-5556, Model SSEW-FM, Custom or approved equals. Refer to Drawings for locations.

J. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40/80 steel pipe.



1. Refer to Drawings for construction and quantity.

K. Pipe Guards: Fabricate from 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts.

L. Basis of Design Product: Provide Huntco Supply LLC, (800)547-5909, Model #BRP3 bicycle rack or equal.

1. Refer to Drawings for quantity and locations. 2. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer standards.

M. Gates: Provide fabricated gates of steel frame, wire mesh and metal decking as shown on the drawings. Provide rollers, guides and appurtenances as required. Refer to Section 32 3113 for gate operators.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Steel and Iron Finishes:

1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 as applicable.

2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.

1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.



2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with non-shrink, non-metallic grout.

C. Bollards:

1. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

2. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.

1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 1

SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.




C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL AND IRON

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 2-inch woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510.


A. Fasteners: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.



C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

D. Non-welded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

E. Form changes in direction by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.

G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes.



J. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh welded to metal angle frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same metal as railings in which they are installed, with wires perpendicular and parallel to top rail.

2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Un-galvanized Railings: See Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for painting requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset metal pipe sleeves and grouting annular space.

D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.

E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.

F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.

G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.

H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to

concealed steel reinforcements.



3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1416 - 1

SECTION 07 1416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing. B. Protective covering

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 2000 – Earthwork.

B. Section 03 3000 - Concrete substrate.

C. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Perimeter insulation. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C836 - High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing Course.

B. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Waterproofing Manual.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3000 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data for surface conditioner, flexible flashings, joint cover sheet, and joint and crack sealants, with temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01 3300 - Warranties: Procedures for submittals.

B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual.

B. Waterproofing Material Manufacturer: Company specializing in waterproofing membrane with three years experience.



C. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 MOCKUP

A. Construct mockup 100 sq. ft. of vertical waterproofed panel; to represent finished work including internal and external corners, jointing, protective cover.

B. Locate where directed.

C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 6000 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during

application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured. 1.9 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 3300 - Warranties.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURES

A. Sonneborn Type HLM 5000.

B. Section 01 6000 - Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 MEMBRANE COMPOUND MATERIAL

A. Waterproofing Membrane: ASTM C836; one component elastomeric compound; cold applied, quick setting; 60 mil minimum cured thickness.

B. Cured Membrane Characteristics:

Properties Test Results Tensile Strength ASTM D412 150 +/- 25 Elongation ASTM D412 600% Hardness - Shore 00 ASTM C836 85 Moisture Vapor ASTM E96 01-dry perms



2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint and Crack Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

B. Back-up Material: Butyl rod. 2.4 PROTECTIVE MATERIALS

A. Protection Board (at building): Rigid insulation specified in Section 07 2100.

B. Protection Board (at exterior retaining walls): ¼” thick biodegradable hardboard, as approved by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system.

B. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not

detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials.

C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator.

D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant materials using depth to width ratio as recommended

by sealant manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply 12” wide strip of joint cover sheet over cracks, non-working joints.

B. Center cover sheet over crack or joints. Roll sheet into 1/8 inch coating of waterproofing material. Apply second coat over sheet extending minimum of 6 inches beyond sheet edges. Apply this procedure to joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces.

C. Apply waterproofing material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Apply and spread waterproofing material to minimum 60 mils wet thickness.



E. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, angles, and over joints.

F. Seal items protruding to or penetrating through membrane and install counter flashing

membrane material. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 7000 - Project Closeout: Protecting installed work.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

C. Protect waterproofing material from damage by adhering insulation board or protection

board, applied with compatible adhesive over waterproofing material surface. Apply protection and insulation boards over cured waterproofing material surface. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.



THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1

SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Perimeter wall insulation. 2. Concealed building insulation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content.



C. Product test reports.


A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire-resistance characteristic specified for each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

B. Recycled Content: Provide glass-fiber insulation with recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent by weight.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." ASTM C 578, VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistance of 5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F, one inch thick, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division.

2. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles 1-inch additional thickness as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation (Walls): ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Not used.

D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:



1. 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick to be used in interior partitions where STC rating is indicated or where partitions are identified as “acoustical.”

2. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C; R-19).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Board Insulation: Mechanically attach to substrate.

C. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.

E. Install glass-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:



1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. In wood-framed construction, staple kraft paper-faced insulation side flanges to face of framing at 12 inches spacing minimum.

4. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 5. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at

vented eaves. 6. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction,

unless otherwise indicated. 7. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to

surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

F. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).



THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 1

SECTION 07 5423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fully adhered TPO membrane roofing system. 2. Cover board. 3. Roof insulation.


A. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

B. Design Wind Resistance/Uplift Pressures: Roofing assembly to withstand 90 mph winds when calculated according to ASCE 7 requirements; capable of withstanding uplift pressure of 45 lbs/sf; to include field, perimeter and corners. Additional performance criteria to include required design wind resistance for building roof edges per ES-1.

C. Fire Resistance: Provide a UL Class A Fire assembly rating. UL approved components shall bear the appropriate UL labeling.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. MSDS Product Data: For all TPO roofing system components.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit SS 7.2: For roof materials, documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirement.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Provide copies of the project’s roof drawings showing sheet layout clearly defining all full and half sheets.

2. Submit sample copy of roofing system "Sample Warranty".

D. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Submit shop drawing of tapered insulation cricket system.




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product. Evidence of such shall be submitted within 15 days of the Date of Proposal.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for membrane roofing system, approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. The Roofing Contractor shall warrant all materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of acceptance of the completed work by the Owner. The Roofing Contractor shall make good any defects in materials or workmanship that may develop during the two-year period by repairing or replacing such defects at his own expense without cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall make all necessary notices for warranty purpose to the primary roofing Manufacturer, to secure timely inspections and issuance of the warranty.

C. Upon Final Completion and prior to final payment, Contractor shall pay all required fees, secure all required inspections, and complete all items necessary to secure and deliver to the Design Professional the following items:

1. All copies of Manufacturer’s punch lists and documentation of completion. 2. Primary Roofing Manufacturer’s 20-year no dollar limit (NDL) labor and material, total

systems warranty on the form provided in this section. The total system warranty shall in-clude the following:

a. Roof membrane. b. Roof membrane adhesion and attachment. c. Roof membrane flashings. d. Roof insulation. e. Roof insulation attachment. f. Roof system fasteners, termination bars, and other miscellaneous accessories sup-

plied by the roofing Manufacturer.

D. Primary Roofing Manufacturer’s Warranty shall cover building code required design wind speed.

E. Primary Roofing Manufacturer’s warranty shall cover defects in materials and workmanship and shall become effective at the completion of the work. This warranty shall not include any buy-out clauses and shall not be prorated.

F. All warranties shall contain written provision(s) stating that they will be fully transferable at any time during the specified warranty period.

G. Submit all items to the Design Professional within ten days of receipt from the Manufacturer or within ten days of the final inspection.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products Company. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Johns Manville.

2. Thickness: 80 mils (2.0 mm), nominal.

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. g. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. h. Non-membrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm) thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.

E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), pre-punched.



F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, minimum thickness 1-1/2 inches.

B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.

C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.

1. Acceptable materials: DensDeck Prime Roof Board or equal approved by Architect.

2.5 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.



B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) in each direction.

E. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Sump insulation around roof drains.

3.2 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing.

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

3.3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1

SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.

C. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MRc4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.


2. Product Data for Credit MRc5: For products using regional materials, documentation indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

D. Maintenance data.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

B. Design Wind Resistance/Uplift Pressures: Roofing assembly performance criteria to include required design wind resistance for building roof systems copings and edge metal (except gutters) per ES-1 requirements.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



B. Special Workmanship Warranty: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

1. Coil-Coated Finishes:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Color to be selected from manufacturer’s full range.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.



D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

H. Splash Pads: Pre-cast concrete Type C; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness.



1. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Fabricate gutters from the following materials:

a. Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.024-inch (0.60-mm) nominal thickness. b. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer to match metal roof panel finish. c. Color: Match metal roof panel color.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate 3-inch by 4-inch rectangular downspouts complete with straight lengths, 45-degree and 90-degree elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick. Paint in accordance with Section 09911.

b. Color: Match color of EIFS directly behind downspouts.

C. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.

D. Tile Adapters: Provide 3-inch by 4-inch by 4-inch PVC center-mount tile adapter. Furnish with PVC pipe cement and sealants required for a watertight connection between downspout and adapter, and between adapter and PVC leader pipe. Paint in accordance with Section 09911. Match color of downspouts.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from the following materials:


B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


C. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.



F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets and straps spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints.

D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in adhesive material compatible with the roofing.

E. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers.

C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend



counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers’ written installation instructions.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 1

SECTION 07 8413 – PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated on Drawings, that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc.



4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 8. Specified Technologies Inc. 9. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 10. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 11. USG Corporation.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

C. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Notify the responsible party or parties of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manu-facturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond. Do not al-low spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.



B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing the firestopping seal with substrates.

C. Verify that system components are clean, dry, and ready for installation.

D. Verify that field dimensions are as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLING PENETRATION FIRESTOPS

A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.

1. Coordinate with other trades to assure that all pipes, conduit, cable, and other items, which penetrate fire rated construction, have been permanently installed prior to installa-tion of firestop assemblies.

2. Schedule the work to assure that partitions and all other construction that conceals pene-trations are not erected prior to the installation of firestop and smoke seals.

B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items.

2. Install materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and pene-trating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces.


A. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until inspection agency has veri-fied that the firestop installation complies with the requirements.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace the firestopping so that it complies with re-quirements of tested and listed system design.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses. Use methods and cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and or assemblies in which openings and joints occur.



B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances. If damage caused by others, owner and general contractor to instruct firestop contractor to make appropriate repairs and charge to appropriate trades.



JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Preformed joint sealants. 5. Acoustical joint sealants.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQc4: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples: Color selection samples of each kind of joint sealant required.

D. Warranties.

1.3 APPLICATION

A. Provide appropriate sealant at all joints between dissimilar materials and all joints exposed to weather.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Neutral-Curing Silicone Low Modulus Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. Pecora Corporation; 890. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrum 1.

2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: Non-sag (NS). 4. Class: 100. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Non-traffic (NT).

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.


a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270. c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.

2. Type: Multi-component (M). 3. Grade: Non-sag (NS). 4. Class: 50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Non-traffic (NT).



B. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.


a. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270. b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

2. Type: Multi-component (M). 3. Grade: Non-sag (NS). 4. Class: 50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T).

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc; Chem-Calk 600. c. May National Associates, Inc; Bondaflex 600. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc; SM 8200. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, pre-compressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in pre-compressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co; Polyseal. d. Schul International, Inc; Sealtite. e. Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150.



2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bi-cellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.



B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.



G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


A. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Preformed foam sealant. 3. Joint Sealant: Urethane, multi-component, non-sag, Class 50. 4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints in dimension stone cladding. c. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. d. Joints between metal panels. e. Joints between different materials listed above. f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and

louvers. g. Control and expansion joints in other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, all exterior weatherseal applications. 3. Joint Sealant: Urethane, multi-component, non-sag, Class 50. 4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:



a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. 3. Joint Sealant: Urethane, multi-component, non-sag, traffic grade, Class 50. 4. Joint Sealant: Preformed foam. 5. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows, and elevator entrances. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, single component, non-sag, neutral curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1

SECTION 08 1113 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors, door and window frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.



3. Product Data for Credit MR 5: For products using regional materials, documentation indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.

a. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

D. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Commercial Door and Hardware, Inc. 5. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 6. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 7. Firedoor Corporation. 8. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 9. Habersham Metal Products Company. 10. Kewanee Corporation (The). 11. Mesker Door Inc. 12. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 13. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc. 14. Security Metal Products Corp. 15. Southwestern Hollow Metal. 16. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 17. Windsor Republic Doors.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, CS, Type B with minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

G. Glazing: Division 8, Section "Glazing."



2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: As indicated. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polyisocyanurate core. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush), 16 gage, 0.059-inch thick minimum, or as required for the performance level.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 16 gage, 0.059-inch thick steel sheet, or as required for

the door performance level.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners. 2. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 18 gage, 0.047-inch thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Windows: 18 gage, 0.047-inch thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.



2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as door face sheet.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as frames.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. For by-pass windows, provide and install the following accessories:

1. Sliding glass rollers and guides of extruded aluminum and steel ball bearings, of size to suit application; include lock and finger pulls.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

B. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:



1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.

b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 16 electrical Sections.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pre-treating.

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.



e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack grout behind frames. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.




A. At Owner’s request, field test hollow metal window assemblies for water penetration resistance in accordance with AAMA 501.2-03 with no uncontrolled water leakage permitted. Per AAMA, uncontrolled water leakage is defined as "any uncontrolled water that appears on any normally exposed interior surfaces, that is not contained or drained back to the exterior, or that can cause damage to adjacent materials or finishes. Water contained within drained flashings, gutters and sills is not considered water leakage. The collection of up to 1/2 ounce in a five minute test period on top of an interior stop or stool integral with the system shall not be considered water leakage".



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory machining for hardware.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

3. Certificates for Credit MR 6 and MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Also include evidence that the product contains rapidly renewable materials in its construction.

a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product. b. Include statement indicating costs for each product made from rapidly renewable

materials.

4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.

5. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."

C. Forest Certification: Provide doors made with not less than 70 percent of wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco, Inc. 3. Buell Door Company Inc. 4. Chappell Door Co. 5. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Eggers Industries. 7. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Haley Brothers, Inc. 9. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood. 10. Ipik Door Company. 11. Lambton Doors. 12. Marlite. 13. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 14. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 15. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 16. Poncraft Door Company. 17. Vancouver Door Company. 18. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

B. Particleboard-Core Doors:



1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). 2. Species: Red oak. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Core: Particleboard. 8. Construction: Five plies.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."



2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: None required. 4. Sheen: Semi-gloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3323 - 1

SECTION 08 3323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Insulated exterior service door – electrically operated.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.


A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Show locations of replaceable fusible links. 3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces.

B. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; fabricated from metal to match curtain slats and finish.

C. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

2.2 HOOD

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Include automatic drop baffle on fire-rated doors to guard against passage of smoke or flame.

2. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a perimeter sealant-joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant.

2.3 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.



2.4 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

2.6 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of door operator is indicated.

B. Push-up Door Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

2.7 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and

NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 11005 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: 208 V.



c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. Provide self-monitoring capability designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device.

E. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."

1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

G. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

H. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

2.8 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead non-rated coiling doors formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Overhead Door Corporation RapidSlat 696 Series Insulated Doors or comparable product by one of the following:

a. ACME Rolling Doors. b. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. c. AlumaTek, Inc. d. C.H.I. Overhead Doors.



e. City-Gates. f. Cookson Company. g. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. h. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc. i. Mahon Door Corporation. j. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. k. Overhead Door Corporation. l. Raynor. m. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. n. Wayne-Dalton Corp. o. Windsor Door.

B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.

C. Fire Rating: 3/4 hour with smoke control, where required.

D. Curtain R-Value: 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (1.057 K x sq. m/W).

E. Door Curtain Material: .050 inch aluminum.

F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile.

G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

H. Hood: Galvanized steel.

I. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia for Counter Door: Galvanized steel.

1. Mounting: Face of wall.

J. Locking Devices: Equip counter door with slide bolt for padlock.

K. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

2. Motor Exposure: Interior.

L. Door Finish:

1. Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

M. Vision Lites: Provide with uniformly spaced openings.

1. Size: 10 inch by 1 inch.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.



GLAZING 08 8000 - 1

SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Storefront framing.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement, and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:

a. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.

b. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass


GLAZING 08 8000 - 2

framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite 6.0 mm thick and a nominal 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide interspace. 3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOWS 5.2 computer program

for the following methodologies:

a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For glazing sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that they comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for

Sealed Insulating Glass Units." 3. National Association of Hollow Metal Manufacturers (NAMM) installation/glazing

guidelines.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 3

4. Bullet Resistant Glass: Products complying with ASTM F1233 and/or UL 752 testing requirements and resistance classification standards for Ballistic Level 1, Impact and Bullet Resistance.

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

B. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 4

C. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Type II, factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Sealing System: Dual seal. 3. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.2 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material indicated above.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 5

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with non-porous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of

liquid sealant.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 6

2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Float-Glass Units, Type I: Kind A (annealed), Class I (clear), float glass, 6.0 mm thick.

B. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units, Type III: Class 1 (clear), Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass, 6.0 mm thick.

2.9 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 1/8 inch, 3.0 mm. 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). 3. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPE

A. Glass Type: Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass, Type II.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 2 (tinted), second surface. Type I, heat-strengthened float glass or

Type III, fully tempered float glass where indicated on Drawings. 4. Tint Color: PPG Solar Gray (approved equals). 5. Interspace Content: Air or Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear Type I, heat-strengthened float glass or Type III, fully tempered float

glass where indicated on Drawings. 7. Low-E Coating: Solarban 60, Sputtered on third surface. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 30 percent minimum. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.35 maximum. 12. Provide safety glazing labeling where required.

2.11 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Low-e-coated, tinted, insulating laminated glass, Type II.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Gray tint to match float glass IG (color selected subject to approval), fully

tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air or Argon. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.

a. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.125 mm. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).

6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on third surface.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 7

7. Visible Light Transmittance: 30 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.32 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.35 maximum. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.12 BULLET-RESISTANT GLASS TYPES

A. General: For purposes of resisting both penetration of bullets and impact-induced spall (fragmentation from the protected side of the glazing) as a result of ballistic attacks. The ability of the security glazing to resist ballistic attack, shall be measured and certified based upon using the UL 752 test requirments and/or ASTM F1233.

B. Product Types: Bullet Resistant Glazing products must comply with applicable standards of testing, be compatible with & sized for specified aluminum storefront system, meet the specified resistance rating per UL752, and may consist of one of the following, or equal:

1. Laminated Glass: All-glass bullet-resistant products constructed of multiple plies of heavy glass and PVB interlayers.

C. UL 752 Classification: The glazing must meet the rating requirments of Level 1 Bullet Resistance per UL752 (protection against handguns of medium power, such as the 9mm, Super .38 Automatic with muzzle energy of 380-460 ft.-lbs). Approx. thickness 1-3/16”. Available Product Manufacturers:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, the products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Viracon Security Glass b. Oldcastle Glass c. Guardian Reedley d. Armour World Wide

D. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated units to produce glazing free of foreign substances and pockets.

E. Speak-Thru Assemblies: Catalog No. CLD 103, 6”round, clear vision, level 1 bullet resistant laminated polycarbonate speak-thru as manufactured by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING

A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications or submit alternate instructions for review and approval by the Architect.

1. Apply adhesive backed foam tape or glazing tape to the fixed hollow metal frame. 2. Install glass on setting blocks and firmly against the tape on the fixed stops.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 8

3. Apply a continuous heel bead of medium modulus silicone sealant between the edge of the steel frame, full perimeter. Care shall be taken to ensure adhesion of sealant to the glass edge and steel frame.

4. At the same time as the heal bead is applied, seal the rabbet area (exposed frame joint at horizontal to vertical frame intersection) at all joints. The sealant shall be a continuous homogenous bead from the heel bead to the exterior face of the frame.

5. Install exterior removable glazing beads. Care shall be exercised to ensure that each stop is reinstalled at the same location and direction to ensure that stop screws go back into the same holes. Prior to reinstalling glass stop screws, seal screw holes with silicone sealant.

6. Insert neoprene, foam or silicone spacers between the removable beads and the glass. 7. Apply silicone sealant in the space formed between the removable beads and the glass. 8. Trim off excess sealant to line up with the top of the glazing beads.

B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

3. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

D. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


GLAZING 08 8000 - 9


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.



GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 2116.23 - 1

SECTION 09 2116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Chase enclosures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.



3. Product Data for Credit MR 5: For regional materials, documentation indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.

a. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Gypsum Company. 2. BPB America Inc.



3. G-P Gypsum. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation. 8. USG Corporation.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL

A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated.

1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints.

2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.

2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent by weight.

B. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M.

1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces.

a. Core: 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel.

C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board".

2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.



2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.

C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."

D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

F. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 hour.

B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Depth: As indicated on drawing. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).

C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following:

1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated.



2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.

B. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of equipment, services, heavy trim, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing.

C. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, and similar items.

D. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

E. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

F. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09 2116.23


PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1

SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath over weather barrier over exterior gypsum board sheathing substrate.

2. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on CMU and cast-in-place concrete substrates.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MRc4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

D. Samples: For each type and color of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.

1. Sample Size: 12” x 12” min.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.

B. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Minimum No. 20 gauge 1 inch (25 mm) self-furred galvanized steel woven wire fabric in compliance with ASTM C 1032, or minimum 1.75 lb/yd2 [1 kg/m2] galvanized steel diamond mesh metal lath in compliance with ASTM C 847.

2.2 MOISTURE BARRIER

A. Two layers, minimum No. 15 vapor permeable asphalt saturated felt in compliance with ASTM D 226, Grade D or equal.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.

B. Metal Accessories:

1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

3. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.

a. Small-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated.

4. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges.

5. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.

6. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.

C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.



D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads.

E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.

F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants".

2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.

1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray.

C. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328.

D. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.

E. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Nominal 4.5 oz./yd2 (153 g/m2), symmetrical, interlaced open weave glass fiber fabric treated with alkaline resistant coating.

G. Primer/Sealer/Bonding Agent: Acrylic substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and promote adhesion of finish coat to substrate.

H. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes.

1. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range, in locations as shown on Drawings.

2.6 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials.

B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Brown coat for two-coat plasterwork as follows:



1. Portland Cement Mixes:

a. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

2. Masonry Cement Mixes:

a. Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.

3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:

a. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

4. Plastic Cement Mixes:

a. Brown Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.

5. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes:

a. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering.

B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.


A. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 2. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.

3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.



B. Reinforcement for External Corners:

1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.

C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and as follows:

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m). b. Horizontal and other Non-vertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not

greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas

(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.

3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

B. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork on sheathed wood construction or 1-inch EPS foam over sheathed wood construction.

1. Portland cement mixes. 2. Masonry cement mixes. 3. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 4. Plastic cement mixes. 5. Portland and plastic cement mixes.

C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to finish to match Architect's sample.

D. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, bonding agents, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhered finishes, omit finish coat.

3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.

END OF SECTION 092200


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216- 1

SECTION 09 2216 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

a. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.



A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.



2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 14 gage, 0.0747 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645-07.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 22 gage, 0.0299 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0209 inch (25 gage). 2. Metal stud gage schedule: up to 8 feet long – 0.0209 inch (25 gage); up to 12 feet long –

0.0299 (22 gage); and over 12 feet long – 0.0359 inch (20 gage). 3. Studs at Door Jambs: Double, 0.0478 inch (18 gage), welded.

B. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

C. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inches.


A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.



B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

E. Install bridging in non-load bearing stud wall assemblies at 4’-0” O.C., vertically.

3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.



3. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

C. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 4. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.4 INSTALLING CONTROL JOINTS

A. Provide studs or furring channels at each side of control joints.

B. Install control joints at the following locations:



1. Partitions or furring abuts a structural element (except floor) or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 2. Ceiling or soffits abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition or other vertical

penetration. 3. Construction changes within plane of partition or ceiling. 4. Partition or furring run exceeds 30 feet. 5. Ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction with perimeter relief; 30 feet

without relief. 6. Exterior soffits exceed 30 feet in either direction. 7. Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceiling areas are joined. 8. Expansion or control joints that occur throughout the building itself. 9. Less-than-ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from

both corners. Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Treat window openings in same manner as doors.



GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for soffits and sheathing. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Bullet-resistant wall panels. 5. Security wire mesh.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. LEED Submittals:


a. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.

a. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. TempleInland. h. USG Corporation.

B. Regular Type:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

C. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.2 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR SOFFITS, WALL AND ROOF SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "GreenGlass" by TempleInland, "DensGlass Gold" and “DensDeck” by G-P Gypsum, "GlasRoc" by BPB America Inc. or equivalent.

2. Core: 5/8 and 1/4 inch, moisture resistant type where indicated on Drawings.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. c. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. d. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. e. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker. f. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. g. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.



2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm). 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

2.4 BULLET-RESISTANT WALL PANELS

A. Basis of Design: SHOTGARD Model BB 2/6, as manufactured by North American Bullet Proof , Inc.

1. Multi-ply ballistic fiberglass laminate produced from ballistic fiberglass impregnated with a thermoset polyester resin binder. 2. Listed with UL, Inc., 752/Level 1 label, ¼ inch (6.35 mm) thick.

2.5 SECURITY WIRE MESH

A. Basis of Design Product: Style No. C ¾ -13 F expanded flattened steel security mesh, as manufactured by Exmet Industries, Inc., or approved equal. 1. Opening Size: .923 inches (23.4 mm) x 2.1 inches (53.3 mm). 2. Thickness: 0.070 inches (1.77 mm)

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and

removable strip covering slot opening.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and

removable strip covering slot opening.



2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Resilient Channels: Resilient Sound Isolation Clips with 2 ½” x 7/8” hat channels.

C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Where indicated, and prior to installation of gypsum board, apply security wire mesh panels to metal framing members. Tack weld mesh to framing members at 8 inches (203 mm) o. c. Overlap wire mesh sheets a minimum of 2 inches (50.8 mm) and tack weld lapped joints at 8 inches (203 mm).

3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Moisture Resistant: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws or fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.

3.3 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS

A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.



1. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.

2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations as follows:

1. Partitions or furring abuts a structural element (except floor) or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 2. Ceiling or soffits abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition or other vertical

penetration. 3. Construction changes within plane of partition or ceiling. 4. Partition or furring run exceeds 30 feet. 5. Ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction with perimeter relief; 30 feet

without relief. 6. Exterior soffits exceed 30 feet in either direction. 7. Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceiling areas are joined. 8. Expansion or control joints that occur throughout the building itself. 9. Less-than-ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from

both corners. Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Treat window openings in same manner as doors.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Finish in accordance with GA-214 Levels described below:

1. Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required. 2. Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint compound. Surface

shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 3. Level 2: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and

wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint



compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level.

4. Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Prepared surface shall be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of final finishes.

5. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Prepared surface shall be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of final finishes.

6. Level 5: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. A thin skim coat of joint compound or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Prepared surface shall be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of finish paint.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Under ceramic tile or FRP finishes. 3. Level 3: Data and storage rooms. 4. Level 5: Walls exposed to view.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Tile backing panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.



3.7 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, medium orange peel, to produce a uniform texture and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. Provide samples for prior approval.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



CERAMIC TILE 09 3013 - 1

SECTION 09 3013 - CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Unglazed floor tile. 2. Glazed wall tile.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product data for Credit IEQ 4.1 and Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives, sealants and grout, including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Product Data for Credit MR 4: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.


C. Samples:

1. Each type of tile and for each color required.

1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:



1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS


1. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. 2. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp. 3. Buchtal Corporation USA. 4. Cerim-Floor Gres Ceramiche. 5. Crossville Ceramics Company, L.P. 6. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc. 7. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. 8. Interceramic. 9. Lone Star Ceramics Company. 10. Metropolitan Ceramics. 11. Monarch Tile, Inc. 12. Porcelanite, Inc. 13. Seneca Tiles, Inc. 14. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 15. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 16. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Company.

B. Glazed Ceramic Floor Tile:

1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Facial Dimensions: 13 inches square. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Finish: DCOF value of > 0.42, Standard A137.1-2012, Section 9.6. 6. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard range.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile Corporation; Cotto Contempo or comparable product.

C. Glazed Wall Tile: Flat tile as follows:

1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Facial Dimensions: 6-1/2 inches square. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard range.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile Corporation; Cotto Contempo or comparable product.



D. Glazed Wall Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing where applicable.

1. Base: Coved, flat top, module size 6 inch by 13 inch. 2. Base Corner: Coved corner, module size 1 inch by 6 inch. 3. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose, module size 3 by 13 inches. 4. External Corners: Bullnose. 5. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners except with coved base and cap angle

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS


1. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. 2. Boiardi Products Corporation. 3. Bonsal, W. R., Company. 4. Bostik. 5. C-Cure. 6. Custom Building Products. 7. DAP, Inc. 8. Jamo Inc. 9. LATICRETE International Inc. 10. MAPEI Corporation. 11. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 12. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 13. TEC Specialty Products Inc.

B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.

1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.


a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. b. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. d. Bostik, Inc. e. C-Cure. f. Custom Building Products. g. Jamo Inc.



h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corporation. j. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. l. Summitville Tiles, Inc. m. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate marble thresholds to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes as indicated on Drawings.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/4 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.


A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. To be used under tile at plumbing walls; elsewhere, use moisture- and mold-resistant gypsum board. See Section "Gypsum Board" for products and manufacturers.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Available Products:

a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials.

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.



D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section

"Joint Sealants."

H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.

I. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

1. Tile floors in wet areas. 2. Tile floors composed of tiles 12 by 12 inches or larger.

J. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. Paver Tile and Quarry Tile: 3/16 inch.



K. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:

1. Glazed Wall Tile: 3/16 inch.

L. Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F115.

1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 2. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior wall installation; thin-set mortar; over cementitious backer units; TCA W244, where indicated by Room Finish Schedule in Drawings.

1. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set or Latex-portland cement mortar. 2. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5123 - 1

SECTION 09 5123 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:



C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0

percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.



C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. BPB USA. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 5. Tectum Inc. 6. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.

C. Basis of Design Styles (or approved equals):

1. Mineral based, textured pattern, size 2 ft by 2 ft; USG Interiors, Inc. product Frost Climaplus – FLB with Centricitee grid.

D. Color: White.

E. LR: Not less than 0.80.

F. NRC: Not less than 0.40, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.

G. CAC: Not less than 35.

H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

I. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

J. Modular Size: As indicated in Room Finish Schedule on Drawings.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING




1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. BPB USA. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

D. Install hangers at each corner of light fixtures and where required for bracing.

E. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

F. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.



G. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 1

SECTION 09 6513 – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient wall base, and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

3. Product Data for Credit MR 6: For products containing rapidly renewable materials, include supporting documentation. Include statement indicating costs for each product made from rapidly renewable materials.

C. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 4-by-6-inch sections of each different color and pattern of resilient base required.



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor coverings.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient base installation.



D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient base installation.

E. Install resilient base after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Rubber base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

2.2 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c. Flexco, Inc. d. Forbo Flooring, Inc. e. Johnsonite. f. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H. Finish: Low luster.

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.



2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications; Reducer strip for resilient floor covering and carpet, Joiner for tile and carpet. For transitions not indicated, install appropriate products from the following manufacturers:

1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 2. Johnsonite. 3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 4. Roppe Corporation. 5. Stoler Industries.

B. Material: Rubber.

C. Profile and Dimensions: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products or approved equals, at transitions indicated (Johnsonite Product Numbers provided):

1. Carpet to Polished Concrete; CRS-XX-A. 2. Ceramic Tile to Polished Concrete; See Section 09 3013. 3. Rubber Flooring to Polished Concrete; CRS-XX-B.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Cap Strip: Tapered vinyl cap provided or approved by manufacturer.

C. Top Shield: Apply manufacturer’s standard sealing product.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient base.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.



4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient base until it is same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient base and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient base immediately before installation.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Adhere resilient base tightly to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient base.

B. Cover resilient base until Substantial Completion.





TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 1

SECTION 09 6813 – TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Documentation for Credit MR 4: Certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3:

a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.

b. For installation adhesive, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Sustainability: Provide the Statement of the Achievement Level the carpet has attained for Platinum points, based on specific Sustainable Attribute Performance for all product stages according to ANSI/NSF 140.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Sample warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.




A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with CRI 104.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, loss of face fiber, and delamination.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide InterfaceFLOR or comparable products from other manufacturers.

B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Pattern: Route 66 (Internal Halls and Main Hallways), Square Footage (Offices and Classrooms).

D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.

E. Fiber Type: Tufted, textured loop construction and tufted cut pile.

F. Pile Thickness: .118 inch and .145 inch.

G. Stitches: 10.33 and 14 stitches per inch.



H. Gage: Route 66 (1/12) and Square Footage (1/10).

I. Total Weight: 20 and 22 oz./sq. yd. for finished carpet tile.

J. Primary Backing/Backcoating: GlasBac RE Tile and GlasBac Tile.

K. Size: 20 by 20 inches (500 by 500 mm).

L. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Protekt.

M. Antimicrobial Treatment: Intersept.

2.2 M ANUFACTURERS

A. Other manufacturers offering comparable products:

1. Blue Ridge Commercial Carpets, product EnviroFlex. 2. Mohawk Industries. 3. Mats, Inc. 4. Milliken.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



D. Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

E. Installation Method: TacTiles adhesive-less system, or as recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

G. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

H. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

I. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

J. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

K. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

L. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, “Protecting Indoor Installations."



EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 1

SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Exterior gypsum board. 4. Concrete masonry units (CMU).

B. Except as otherwise noted or specified paint all surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment and similar items. Finish spaces shall be considered as exposed to view.

C. Paint Schedule: Unless otherwise specified, all finishes shall be three (3) coat systems, consisting of one (1) sealer or prime coat, and two (2) finish coats, and all finishes shall be in compliance with the Paint Schedule listed in this specification.

D. Repainting of Existing or Repaired Substrates: Where damaged, touchup of the prime/sealer coat shall satisfy the first coat requirement of the paint schedules. Apply other coats as specified.

E. Closed Openings/Patching Walls: Substrate materials used to close and patch shall receive texture as required to match surrounding areas, or as specified, shall be prime coated, and shall receive two finish coats of paint. Finish coats shall be carried to corners at both sides of patched areas; from floor below, and to ceiling above patched areas.

F. Excluded Items: Except as otherwise shown or specified, the following items and surfaces are excluded from painting requirements:

1. Materials with factory applied finish coats, except for matching touch-up requirements. 2. Materials which have integral color finish, such as aluminum, glass, floor coverings,

acoustical tile, integral colored stucco and plaster.

G. All work, appurtenant accessories and operations which are not specifically mentioned but which are obvious or normally necessary, or required for proper execution of the work, shall be provided as if specifically set forth in the Specifications and Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

C. LEED Submittals:




D. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

E. As-built paint schedule reflecting the final manufacturer, color, color number, and location of each color to be included in the project close-out documentation.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.

B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.

C. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.



2.4 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS

A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).

2.5 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS

A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5).

2.6 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS

A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.



C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A. Gloss Level 5.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3H. Gloss Level 5.

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).

C. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.2A. Gloss Level 5.

a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).

Note: Substrates not listed are subject to architectural review to determine the MPI standard during the submittal process.



INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 1

SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete. 2. Masonry 3. Steel. 4. Gypsum board. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Wood.

B. Except as otherwise noted or specified paint all surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment and similar items. Finish spaces shall be considered as exposed to view.

C. Paint Schedule: Unless otherwise specified, all finishes shall be three (3) coat systems, consisting of one (1) sealer or prime coat, and two (2) finish coats, and all finishes shall be in compliance with the Paint Schedule listed in this specification.

D. Repainting of Existing or Repaired Substrates: Where damaged, touchup of the prime/sealer coat shall satisfy the first coat requirement of the paint schedules. Apply other coats as specified.

E. Closed Openings/Patching Walls: Substrate materials used to close and patch shall receive texture as required to match surrounding areas, or as specified, shall be prime coated, and shall receive two finish coats of paint. Finish coats shall be carried to corners at both sides of patched areas; from floor below, and to ceiling above patched areas.

F. Excluded Items: Except as otherwise shown or specified, the following items and surfaces are excluded from painting requirements:

1. Materials with factory applied finish coats, except for matching touch-up requirements. 2. Materials which have integral color finish, such as aluminum, glass, floor coverings,

acoustical tile, integral colored stucco and plaster.

G. All work, appurtenant accessories and operations which are not specifically mentioned but which are obvious or normally necessary, or required for proper execution of the work, shall be provided as if specifically set forth in the Specifications and Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.



C. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content.


D. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

E. As-built paint schedule reflecting the final manufacturer, color, color number, and location of each color to be included in the project close-out documentation.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:



1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Free Crystalline Silica. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. z. Asbestos. aa. Chromium.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

B. Base Coat: United States Gypsum, Product "First Coat", or equal.

2.3 METAL PRIMERS

A. Rust Inhibitive Latex Metal Primer: MPI #107.

B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.

2.4 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.

2.5 SOLVENT-BASED COATINGS

A. Alkyd Varnish, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #74.

2.6 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 3).

B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).

C. Interior Latex Fire Retardant: MPI #64.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.



D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets. e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting. d. Telephone Backer Panels.

E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.



3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Latex Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1B. Gloss Level 5

a. Prime Coat: Rust Inhibitive Water Based primer. b. Intermediate Coat: W.B. Light Industrial Coating. c. Topcoat: W.B. Light Industrial Coating.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J. Gloss Level 5

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex.

C. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood, medium-density fiberboard, hardboard and dressed lumber.

1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. Gloss Level 5

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex.

2. Alkyd System over Stain: MPI INT 6.3D, Gloss Level 5

a. Base Coat: Wood Stain. b. Prime Coat: Sanding sealer/Shellac. c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd Varnish. d. Topcoat: Alkyd Varnish (Semigloss).

3. Fire Retardant Latex System: MPI INT 6.4P. Gloss Level 1.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Topcoat: Interior Latex Fire Retardant, (ULC Approved).

D. Floor Coatings:

1. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI INT 3.2G.

a. Prime Coat: Concrete Floor Sealer. KWAL Accu-Pro, Kryton Krystoseal b. Topcoat: Concrete Floor Sealer.

E. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. Gloss Level 3

a. Base Coat: KWAL 0873, Dunn Edwards Vinylastic (W101), USG First Coat. b. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.



c. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Interior latex (Satin).

2. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. Gloss Level 5

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Top Coat: Interior latex topcoat. (Semigloss).

Note: Substrates not listed are subject to architectural review to determine the MPI standard during the submittal process.



TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2113 - 1

SECTION 10 2113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For phenolic, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

E. Product certificates.

F. Maintenance data.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Partition Systems Incorporated of South Carolina; Columbia Phenolic Series 68000 Partitions, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 3. Ampco, Inc. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 5. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 6. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 7. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 8. Global Steel Products Corp. 9. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 10. Metpar Corp. 11. Rockville Partitions Incorporated. 12. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company. 13. Shanahan's Limited. 14. Tex-Lam Manufacturing, Inc. 15. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. 16. Young Group Ltd. (The); Fabricated Products Division; DesignRite Partitions.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Overhead braced.

D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels. 25% recycled material.

E. Pilaster Shoes: Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware.

F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; stainless steel.

H. Phenolic-Panel Finish: Facing sheet of one color and pattern in each room.

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, with manufacturer's standard dark-color core.



2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, spring-loaded type. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage.

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.



B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels; 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls.


A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure Toilet Partitions and Screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.



SIGNAGE 10 400 - 1

SECTION 10 1400 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plaques. 2. Dimensional characters. 3. Panel signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Documentation for Credit MR 4: Certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content.

a. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

D. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide written documentation of manufacturer’s warranty.


SIGNAGE 10 400 - 2

B. Warranty must guarantee interior signs for the life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated.

B. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze).

2.2 PLAQUES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following;

1. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 2. A. R. K. Ramos. 3. Gemini Incorporated. 4. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 5. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 6. Mills Manufacturing Company. 7. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 8. Southwell Company (The).

B. Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects, as follows;

1. Plaque Material: Bronze. 2. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard stipple texture. 3. Border Style: Projected bevel. 4. Mounting: Concealed studs, non-corroding for substrates encountered. 5. Design: City of Las Cruces Standards and approved by the Architect and Owner.

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following;

1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 3. A. R. K. Ramos. 4. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 5. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 6. Gemini Incorporated. 7. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 8. Mills Manufacturing Company.


SIGNAGE 10 400 - 3

9. Mohawk Sign Systems. 10. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 11. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 12. Southwell Company (The).

B. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the following requirements.

1. Character Material: Aluminum. 2. Size: Twelve inches. 3. Font: Ribbon Deep 4. Color(s): Anodized. 5. Mounting: Concealed studs, non-corroding for substrates encountered.

2.4 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. Manufacturers

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Century Sign Builders, which is located at 2117 Commercial NE: Albuquerque, NM 87106, (505) 888-2901 or other providing equal Basis-of-Design Product as approved by Architect.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Diversity Sign System or a comparable product as approved by Architect.

1. General Characteristics

a. Regulatory Compliance: All signs shall conform to the requirements of regulations list in section 1.3 and shall be designed to meet the stated requirements for color, contrast, letter height, install location and other characteristics required for accessibility and by local, state and federal regulations.

b. Base material or chassis: Curved aluminum sign frame

i. Extruded aluminum sign frame consisting of a convex curved face, side chan-nels and (2) end caps such that that the lens) with tactile lettering/graphics, changeable insert and printed graphic insert are held and contained within the sign frame.

ii. Overall size and depth/curvature of sign frame as per approved shop drawings.

iii. Finishes for aluminum frame and end caps as per approved shop drawings

c. Lens or cover material: lens and covers shall be constructed using 0.125” (342-101) or 0.0625” (322-101) clear single-ply non-glare acrylic multi-polymer (Rowmark).

d. Changeable message insert will be fabricated from commonly available transparency media no less than 5 mil thick that is compatible with inkjet or laser printers such as 3M CG3710 or equivalent.


SIGNAGE 10 400 - 4

e. Printed graphic inserts: Printed inserts will be created using a satin-coated, tear-resistant, rigid PVC media with eco-solvent waterfast & UV stable inks.

i. Printed background inserts must be manufactured in color managed workflow with the following capacities:

ii. All printing must be done using a profiled printer with transmissible ICC pro-file.

iii. All approved colors used in final design must have LAB values recorded and submitted to architect owner for future reference and duplication.

iv. Printing must be performed on calibrated printer such that future orders of in-sert can be reproduced within 5 Delta E of recorded LAB values.

f. Tactile Raised Lettering/Graphic method: Tactile lettering and symbols shall be formed using rotary engraving method and bonded to sign plaque using 3M Scotch 467HP adhesive. Text, numbers and symbols must have 1/32” return cut to 22 degree angle. Text, numbers and symbols must be constructed with materials having embedded coloration that is the final approved color for the signs. Products with painted or otherwise applied coloration method are not acceptable.

g. Braille Method: Braille must be constructed using the Edgerton Grade 2 Braille System using clear Raster beads.

h. Vinyl Graphics: As indicated on the shop drawings, signs may have text, graphics or decorative elements created using applied vinyl graphics film. Such graphics shall:

i. Be constructed on high performance cast vinyl graphic film products such as 3M Scotchcal or equal with a 5 year or greater warranty.

ii. Signs shall be cut from sufficiently large rolls of material to minimize seams or joining of material to create one sign.

iii. All lettering and graphics shall be computer cut from professionally quality artwork. No hand cut vinyl film shall be installed.

iv. Signs shall be installed free of bubbles, wrinkles or other anomalies.

i. Other features:

i. Signs may be configured in one, two or three sided configurations for various applications as wall mounted, suspended, flag mounted or free standing as per the approved shop drawings.

j. Installation method:

i. Wall mounted signs: signs shall be mounted using double-sided vinyl foam tape (1/16” thickness), silicon adhesive or mechanical anchors as per the ap-proved shop drawings.

ii. Flag mount hardware: provide custom mounting bracket for flag mounted signs as indicated on shop drawings.

iii. Wall mount hardware: provide custom mounting hardware for wall mounted signs as indicated on shop drawings.

iv. Suspended mount hardware: provide custom mounting hardware for ceiling suspended mounted signs as indicated on shop drawings.

v. Free standing hardware: provide base plate and floor fasteners (optional) for free standing signs as indicated on the shop drawings.


SIGNAGE 10 400 - 5

vi. Cubicle mounted hardware: provide removable mounting method for mounting sign at cubicles, workstations or systems furniture partitions as indicated on the shop drawings.

vii. Work surface hardware: provide angle bottom flange or stand to allow signs to be displayed in a vertical (slightly angled) fashion when placed on transaction counters, desks, etc. as indicated on the shop drawings.

2. Color Selections

a. Tactile lettering/graphics: As per approved shop drawings b. Graphic insert: As per approved shop drawings c. Changeable insert: As per approved shop drawings d. Frame and mounting hardware: As per approved shop drawings

3. Font Selections

a. Tactile lettering: As per approved shop drawings b. Graphic insert lettering: As per approved shop drawings c. Changeable insert lettering: As per approved shop drawings

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage.

B. Inspect conditions of installation areas and other conditions which may affect installation of signage to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation.

C. Do not begin installation until installation areas are within manufacturer's specified tolerances and have been prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. If installation area preparation is the responsibility of another installer, do not proceed with installation. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation immediately.

E. Commencement of work is deemed as acceptance of installation conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify mounting heights and locations for signage will comply with specified requirements.

B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper installation.

C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.


SIGNAGE 10 400 - 6

D. Verify completion of other installation conditions needed for sign installation including backing materials, reinforcement, electrical and data.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.

1. Mounting: Mount characters with face of letters 2 inches from wall surface.

D. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for type of wall surface indicated.

1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement.

3.4 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND REPAIR

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.5 TRAINING & CLOSEOUT

A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty and cleaning/maintenance instructions.

B. Provide digital templates for end-user updatable inserts for interior signage.

C. Provide necessary tools and source for consumables for end-user updateable inserts for interior signage.


SIGNAGE 10 400 - 7

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Provide a plaque in the location shown on the drawings.

B. Provide wall mounted interior signage in locations shown on Drawings.

C. Provide 8 inch high cast letters, 27 ea. at the monument sign, and 12 inch high cast letters, 27 ea. at the public entrance.

1. Text: “EAST MESA PUBLIC SAFETY COMPLEX”



FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 1

SECTION 10 4413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Maintenance data.


A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTINGUISHER CABINET MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 6 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Gemini Series, G2720-RM. b. Fire End & Croker Corporation. c. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.



e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc. f. Moon-American. g. Potter Roemer LLC. h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.

B. Cabinet Construction: Non-rated.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semi-recessed cabinet installation.

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 4-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as cabinet.

F. Door Style: Fully glazed panel, frameless.

G. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

I. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, and brackets to mount directly to wall where required, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

J. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.

b. Interior of cabinet and door.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated. To comply with ADA wall projection guidelines, the specified cabinet must be mounted with its leading edge at or below 27 inches A.F.F.

C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 1

SECTION 10 4416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen Manufacturing Co., product MP10 and WC-6L, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. h. Moon-American. i. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 2

j. Potter Roemer LLC. k. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Wet-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:K, 1.6-gal. (6-L) nominal capacity, with potassium-acetate based chemical in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage for use in kitchen.

C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A-80B:C, 10 lbs. nominal capacity, with mono-ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container for use in general locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



AUDIO VISUAL EQUIPMENT 11 5213 - 1

SECTION 11 5213 – PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes front-projection screens, flat screen television mounts, and projector mounts.

B. See Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for screen and projector mount installation.

C. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections including metal device boxes for switches and conduit, where required.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of screen and television mount indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of projection screens. Include the following:

1. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. 2. Anchorage details for projection screen mounts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS

A. Basis of Design Product: Tensioned Contour Electrol.

1. Other manufacturers offering similar products:

a. BEI Audio-Visual Products; Alpine XL. b. Draper Inc.; Paragon. c. Stewart Filmscreen Corporation; Model A-B.

B. Type: Electrically operated projection screen for ceiling installation consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, electric brake, limit switches, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for complete installation.

C. Surface-Mounted, Metal-Encased, Electrically Operated Screens: Motor-in-roller units designed and fabricated for surface mounting on wall or ceiling, fabricated from formed-steel sheet or from aluminum extrusions; with flat back design and vinyl covering or baked-enamel finish.



D. Motor Location: Audience left side of roller housing / case assembly. Mounted inside roller and secured to case with steel motor mount bracket.

E. Rolling Direction: Specify viewing surface to unroll off back of motorized roller.

F. Electrical Connections: Housing designed with internal junction box and plug-in wiring connections to allow housing to be installed and connected to building power supply separately from motor and viewing surface.

G. Roller: 4-1/2 inches diameter aluminum roller mounted in heavy duty bracket with self-aligning bearing.

H. Viewing surface: Securely attached to roller at top and at bottom to weighted dowel. Provide each side of viewing surface with black masking borders and tab-guide cable tensioning system to maintain even lateral tension and to hold surface flat. Top of screen shall be masked by additional black drop using length as specified below:

1. Material: Stretchable, matt white, washable, vinyl surface without backing; Pearlescent surface as manufactured by Da-Lite Screen Company.

2. Size of viewing surface: 67 by 110 inches (170 by 280 cm) and one 106 by 188 inches (269 by 478) nominal sizing. Sized with a width:height (aspect) ratio conforming to the HDTV (16:9) format.

3. Joints: Viewing surface shall contain no seams. 4. Edge treatment: Variable width black masking borders included as part of tab-guide

cable tension system. 5. Black drop material above viewing surface:

1. Additional drop material at top of screen (above viewing surface) shall be matte black fabric.

2. Length of additional drop shall be 18 inches total.

I. Motor:

1. Type: 110-120- VAC, 60 HZ, 3 wire, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, and equipped with internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and pre-set accessible limit switches.

2. Mount inside screen roller on rubber vibration insulators.

J. Low voltage control:

1. Low voltage controller with 3-button wall switch, model 40973 as manufactured by Da-Lite Screen Company or equal as approved by Architect. Mount wall switch at location indicated on Drawings.

2. Provide key locking switch cover plate, model 40962 as manufactured by Da-Lite Screen Company or equal as approved by Architect.

2.2 PROJECTOR MOUNTS

A. Basis of Design Product: Chief Manufacturing, Model CMS-445N Speed-Connect Suspended Ceiling Tile Replacement Kit with Power Outlet Housing, and CMS Adjustable Extension



Columns with 6 – 9 inch adjustable extension columns, or approved equals. Mount projector at a distance from screen in accordance with the Owner’s instructions to coordinate with the current projector type to be used.

B. Provide a 3-gang box mounted at 48” A.F.F. near screen switch location with ¾” conduit with pull string to above ceiling for Owner provided, Owner installed projector controls.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Installation Hardware: Provide additional mounting hardware, fasteners, and other components of type, size, and spacing recommended by manufacturer for complete, functional, secure installation of permanently mounted projection screens.

2.4 TELEVISION MOUNTS

A. Basis of Design Product: Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc.: Model PWM-0262 Flat Panel Wall Mount.

1. Tilting Mount: 0 - 20 degree tilt with extension angles, mild steel, 11-gauge, drilled for anchorage.

B. Basis of Design Product: Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc.; Model QLP-3642 Advance Quick Link Flat Panel Ceiling Mounts.

1. 360 degrees of swivel with locking adjustment and 30 degrees threaded tilt adjustment. C. Exposed Surfaces: Black Powder Coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered.

B. Verify that concealed blocking and anchors for projector, and television mounts are in correct position. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.



HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 2113 - 1

SECTION 12 2113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.

B. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS


1. Bali Blinds. 2. Hunter Douglas. 3. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company. 4. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners.

1. Width: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Finish: As indicated.



a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish.

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs.

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends.

E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag.

1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch (25 mm) or less: Braided string.

F. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard.

G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, and linkage rod.

H. Lift Operation: Manual.

I. Mounting: Ceiling mounting.

J. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A. Concealed Components: Non-corrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows:

1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch (13 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed.

C. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.

D. Color-Coated Finish:

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish.

E. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any.

B. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head.

C. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

D. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Install blinds at all exterior windows (excluding glass block).


ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR DACC B341

Bryan Morris, P.E. RBM Engineering, Inc. 15024

DACC B341 RENOVATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 26, 27 and 28 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 05 03 - EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 26 05 08 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 05 19 - WIRES AND CABLES 26 05 26 - GROUNDING 26 05 29 - SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 30 - ELECTRIC BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 35 – RACEWAYS 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS 26 24 19 - MOTOR & CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 27 16 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LUMINARES 27 00 00 – COMMUNICATION SYTSTEMS 28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0000 - 1

SECTION 26 0000 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. General: This section specifies several categories of provisions for electrical work including: 1) Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 1, 2) General performance requirements within the electrical systems as a whole, and 3) General work to be performed as electrical work, because of its close association.

1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Drawings: Refer to the E-series drawings for graphic representations, schedules and notations showing electrical work.

B. Specifications: Refer to the Division 26 sections for the primary technical specifications of

electrical work.

C. General Outline: The facilities and systems of the electrical work can be described (but not by way of limitation) as follows: 1) Electrical service and power distribution system, including the electrical connecting of equipment not specified to be connected as work of another division, 2) Motor starters and control/protection work as indicated, 3) Systems of branch circuits for lighting and convenience outlets, 4) System of outlets and conduits for telephone video and data system, and 5) Fire alarm system.

1.4 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with conduit and similar services

running parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 10'-0" overhead clearance where possible.

2. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire

electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. 3. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large

units of electrical work (equipment).



B. The drawings and these specifications are complementary, each one to the other, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Carefully examine the drawings and specifications and report any discrepancies affecting the work to the Architect. The Architect will issue such written instructions or interpretations as may be required.

C. The electrical plans are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and

the work of the other trades will allow. Such minor changes as are necessary to make the electrical work conform to the work of other trades and to the building shall be made without cost to the Owner. Minor changes are things such as moving a light switch within a room to be on the proper side of the door swing, or moving a light fixture over one or two ceiling tiles.

D. Branch circuit numbers are for guidance only and need not necessarily conform to the finished job.

Actual circuit numbers used shall be recorded on the record documents, and noted correctly on the panel schedules.

E. The maximum number of circuits combined in one raceway shall be three; no circuit shall be

combined without prior approval of the Architect or unless specifically shown on the drawings.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS

A. General: Refer to the General conditions, Supplementary conditions and Division 1 for general administrative/procedural requirements related to compliance with codes and standards. Specifically, for the electrical work (in addition to standards specified in individual work sections), the following standards are imposed, as applicable to the work in each instance: 1. AWS standards for welding. 2. ANSI C 2, National Electrical Safety Code. 3. ANSI C 73, Dimensions of attachment plugs and receptacles. 4. NECA standards for installation. 5. NEMA standards for materials and products.

1.6 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES

A. All work and material shall conform to the requirements of OSHA and all national and state Laws and ordinances having jurisdiction at the job site. The (NEC) National Electrical Code, 2011 Edition, or latest edition being enforced, shall be strictly adhered to. NEC requirements are considered "minimum requirements". Where requirements of the contract documents exceed NEC, the contract documents govern.

B. Contractors shall be duly licensed to perform the work required, as noted in the Supplementary

Conditions.

C. Permits are required as noted in the General Conditions.

D. Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection and approval from the electrical inspection bureau having jurisdiction.



E. All electrical systems shall be grounded in strict accordance with the requirements of the National

Electrical Code.

1.7 INDUSTRY PUBLICATION STANDARDS

A. The publications and standards of the latest issue at the time of bid, of the following organizations, where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, shall apply: 1. ANSI---American National Standards Institute

2. ASTM---American Society of Testing and Materials

3. CBM----Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association

4. IEEE---Institute of Electrical and Electronic Architects

5. IPCEA--Insulated Power Cable Architects Association

6. NEC----National Electrical Code

7. NECA---National Electrical Contractors Association

8. NEMA---National Electrical Manufacturers Association

9. NESC---National Electrical Safety Code

10. NFPA---National Fire Protection Association

11. UL-----Underwriters Laboratory

12. IESNA--Illuminating Architecting Society of North America

13. LEED—Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 for general requirements concerning work related and administrative submittals.

1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Use all means necessary to protect electrical materials and equipment before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work of other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner and at no extra cost to him.

1.13 WARRANTY, GUARANTEE

A. As described in the General Conditions and supplementary Conditions the work to be performed shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after final acceptance against faulty workmanship and/or materials, and any failure or trouble due to such causes within the period of guarantee shall be made good upon demand of the Owner and without cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. General: Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections for

general requirements on products, materials and equipment. The following provisions expand the requirements as applicable to electrical work: a. All material shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or

be listed under reexamination service. All materials shall be of the best grade and latest pattern of manufacturer as specified.

b. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall present a neat

mechanical appearance when completed.

c. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer. d. Where no specific material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product

made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of the Architect.

e. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged

in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design.

1. Altitude: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily for the

function intended at the altitude of the project site. 2. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the

electrical work, and with other work requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work.

3. Substitution: Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for

substitution guidelines.. 4. Work Quality: Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical

system shall be done in a first class workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. In the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide engraved plastic laminated nameplates at all locations of major units of electrical equipment including panelboards, control centers, alarm and similar systems. Nameplates shall be constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, 1/8 inch thick, 3-ply with black surfaces and white



core. Engraving shall be with Roman Gothic lettering, 3/16 inch high, appropriately spaced. Nameplates shall be attached to control devices by use of self tapping flat head chromium plated screws unless approved otherwise. Screw tips on inside of device cover shall be filed to provide a smooth, non-abrasive finish. Gluing, taping and riveting of nameplate to control device is not acceptable. Nameplate information shall include name of panel/equipment, panel electrical characteristics and branch/feeder circuit designation which feeds it. Nomenclature on nameplate(s) shall be similar to the following examples: Panelboards: Panel L1CA 120/208V, 3PH, 4W CCT. A-28 Air Handler AHU-2 CCT. M2-2 Exhaust Fan EF-5 CCT. P-4

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Comply with the requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work, except as individually authorized by the Architect, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted.

B. Structural Limitations: Contractor shall be cautious of the unique hollow concrete, post tension

slabs used on this project. Do not cut structural framing, walls, floors decks and other members intended to withstand stress, except with the Architect's written authorization. Authorization will be granted only where there is no other reasonable method for completing the electrical work, and where the proposed cutting clearly does not materially weaken the structure.

C. Patching: Where patching is required to restore other work because of either cutting or other

damage inflicted during the installation of electrical work, engage the original installer to complete the patching of the other work. Restore the other work in every respect, including the elimination of visual defects in exposed finishes, as judged by the Architect.

3.3 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: The work of this article is defined to include whatever excavating and backfilling is necessary to install the electrical work. Coordinate the work with other excavating and backfilling in the same area, including dewatering, flood protection provisions and other temporary facilities. Coordinate the work with other work in the same area, including other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving, and floor slabs on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling.

3.4 CONCRETE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: The work of this article is defined to include whatever concrete work is necessary or shown specifically to install the electrical work; but excluding equipment base grouting. Coordinate the work with other work, particularly other concrete work and accessories.



1. General Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions of Division 3 sections for electrical work concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, mix design, materials (if not noted on drawings, use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 3 work where possible), admixtures, accessories (including waterstops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing, submittals, and other requirements of the concrete work. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to the Architect for resolution before proceeding.

3.5 ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT

A. General: Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Upon completion of the work, the various systems operated under load conditions shall be tested for short circuits and grounds in accordance with the method and resistance values outlined in the National Electrical Code and for load balance on feeders and branch circuits.

B. The complete system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. Make any repairs or adjustments necessary to this end to the satisfaction of the Architect.

C. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing.

D. Coordination with Mechanical: Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of mechanical systems and other power consuming equipment. Accurately record on record documents locations of all conduits which are underground or otherwise concealed. Test run electrical equipment in coordination with test runs of mechanical system. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly in the operation, sequencing, maintenance and safety/emergency provisions of the electrical systems. Turn over the operations to the Owner's personnel at the time(s) of substantial completion. Until the time of final acceptance of the total work of the contract, respond promptly with consultation and services to assist the Owner's personnel with operation of the electrical systems.

E. Commissioning.

3.6 SAFETY

A. Contractor shall not connect permanent utility power to the electrical distribution system until it is safe. Contractor shall secure all panel locations or utilize lock-out/tag-out procedures. Perform work in accordance with OSHA, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NESC and other applicable codes to maintain electrical safety at the construction site.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Miscellaneous items not covered in these specifications shall be as indicated on the drawings, installed and connected by the proper method and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. During progress of the Work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the system. Maintain these drawings as called for in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1.

END OF SECTION


EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 26 0503 - 1

SECTION 26 0503 – EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 25781 - Package Roof - Top Air Conditioning Unit.

B. Section 26111 - Conduit.

C. Section 26123 - Building Wire and Cable.

D. Section 26130 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS – None Required. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown. 1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work. B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment

furnished under other sections. C. Determine connection locations and requirements. D. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.


EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 26 0503 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORDS AND CAPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Carol Cable.

2. American Insulated Wire.

3. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.

D. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures

encountered in heat producing equipment.

D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated.

E. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated.

G. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated.

H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment. On all relocated and new equipment whether indicated or not.

END OF SECTION


WIRES AND CABLES 26 0519 - 1

SECTION 26 0519 – WIRES AND CABLES


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 26

section making reference to wires and cables specified herein. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less. Wiring for fire alarm is described in its section, wiring for security is described in its section, wiring for voice, data and video is described in its Section 27 00 00.

B. The applications for cable, wire and connectors required on the project are as follows:

1. Power distribution circuitry

2. Lighting circuitry

3. Equipment connections and controls circuitry

4. Special systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product literature submittal on wiring.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code: 1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials.

C. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL under the following

standards. 1. UL Std. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.

2. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.

D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:



1. WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wire and Cable:

a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. Carol Cable Co. Inc. c. Senator Wire and Cable Co. d. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:

a. AMP b. 3M Company c. O-Z/Gedney Co. d. Square D Company.

2.2 WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed.

B. Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits no. 10 AWG and smaller.

Provide stranded conductors for sizes no. 8 AWG and larger. C. Conductor Material: Copper, 98% conductivity, for all wires and cables. D. Insulation: Provide XHHW-2 insulation for all service entrance wires, feeders larger than #6 and

transformer secondaries larger than #3 AWG. For all other sizes provide THHN/THWN insulation. Color Coding for Phase Identification: All wiring #8 AWG and smaller shall have coloring integral to insulation.

Color code on the project is as follows:

208Y/120 Volts Phase 480y/277 Volts Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Grey Green Ground Green



Green/Yellow Stripe Iso. Ground

E. For wire #6 AWG and larger that does not require color code integral to its insulation, colored electrical tape may be used for color coding, it shall cover not less than 6" of conductor within enclosure wherever possible. Color coding shall be with Scotch 35 tape by 3M Company or equal.

F. All wire on this project shall be new, unused, in good condition and shall be delivered in standard

coils, packages and reels. Samples of all wire shall be submitted by the Contractor when so requested by the Architect for the purpose of determining acceptability of the wire. Wire which has been rejected by the Architect, shall not be used again. Such rejected wire shall be removed from the Owner's premises forthwith. Decisions as to the quality of the wire furnished and the acceptance of such wire shall be made by the Architect.

G. Size of conductors shall be not less than indicated. Branch circuit conductors shall be not smaller

than No. 12 AWG. Conductors for branch circuits of 120 volts more than 100 feet long and of 277 volts more than 230 feet long, from panel to load center shall be No. 10 AWG. The selection of wire sizes for both feeder and branch circuits are used so that voltage drop conforms to the following: Voltage drop in the case of 120/208 and 277/480 volt branch circuits shall not exceed 3.0% at maximum load and 70.0% power factor. Service and feeders shall not exceed 2.0% voltage drop at maximum load and 85% power factor, iron conduit only considered.

H. Remote control wires other than class 2 remote control and signal circuits, shall be no smaller than

#14 conductors. Control wires shall be run in separate conduits. I. Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuits other than parallel wiring of fixtures.

Install 90 degree C. minimum insulation wire within fixture wireways of fluorescent lighting fixtures.

J. When leaving a metal raceway or conduit in a cabinet, box, switch enclosure, control enclosure or

any other like member, conductors shall be protected by means of insulated bushings or end fittings. Conductors may be run in multiple sizes 1/0 to 500 MCM inclusive provided all multiple conductors are the same size, length and type of insulation. When run in multiple they shall be so arranged and terminated as to insure equal division of the total current between all conductors involved.

2.3 CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS

A. Provide UL-listed factory fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.

B. No splices or taps shall be made at any conductors except in outlet boxes, pullboxes, junction

boxes, panelboard boxes, manholes, splice boxes or other exposed locations. All taps and splices shall be made with solderless connections and insulated in a manner providing an effective insulation equal to that of the adjoining wire insulation. Any splice or tap shall be made only on such conductors as are a component part of a single circuit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD



A. Use the following wiring methods as indicated. 1. Wire: install all 600 volt insulation wire in raceway. B. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with NEC. C. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation

work, as necessary for proper interface. Prior to pulling cables or conductors into raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.

D. Pull conductors simultaneously together where more than one is being installed in same raceway.

Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, when necessary. Care shall be exercised while installing wire in conduits so as not to injure conductor insulation. Bending radius of insulated wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended values.

E. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will

not damage cables or raceways. Maximum pulling tension on any wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended values.

F. For wired systems not requiring wire in conduit, conceal all cable in finished spaces. G. Conductors shall not be pulled into conduits until after all plastering or concrete work is completed

and all conduits in which moisture has collected have been swabbed out. H. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Splices shall not be permitted except in junction boxes,

outlet boxes or as previously listed in this section. Splices must be accessible. I. Install splices and taps connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and

insulation rating conductors being spliced.

J. Use splice and tap conductors which are compatible with the conductor material. K. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to

terminal points with no excess. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal. L. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Contractor shall perform meggar tests on all service entrance conductors, all feeders and any other conductors 250 kcmil and larger. The contractor shall submit the test results to the A/E within 48 hours of test, and at least 72 hours prior to permanent connection or enerization. All test failures shall result in cable replacement.

B. Prior to energization, test wires for electrical continuity and for short circuits.



C. Prior to Contractor connecting of utility permanent power to the permanent electrical distribution system, all panels transformers and wiring circuits shall be fully terminated and all panel covers completely installed. If the above cannot be complied with, and the Contractor deviates from this, then he bears all the responsibility to provide lock-out/tag-outs and security of electrical rooms or rooms containing panels.

D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning.

Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION


GROUNDING 26 0526 - 1

SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.

1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of grounding is indicated by drawings. B. Types of grounding in this section include the following:

1. Grounding electrodes

2. Grounding rods

3. Separately derived systems

4. Service equipment

5. Enclosures

6. Systems

7. Equipment


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical grounding. B. ANSI/UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI/UL and UL standards pertaining to

grounding. Provide products which have been UL listed and labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. None Required. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding devices and accessories as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING

A. Materials and Components:

1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide for each electrical grounding indicated, with assembly of materials including, but not necessarily limited to, cables/wires,



connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and other items and accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. Where materials or components are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, NEMA and established industry standards for applications indicated.

B. General: Provide conduit, tube, duct and fittings complying with Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, "Raceways", in accordance with the following listing:

1. Rigid steel conduit

2. Electrical metallic tubing

3. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit

4. Rigid metal conduit fittings

5. EMT fittings, Type I

6. Flexible metal conduit fittings

7. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings

C. Electrical Bonding Jumpers:

1. Bonding Jumper Braid: Copper braided tape, constructed of 30 gauge bare copper wires

and properly sized for indicated applications. 2. Flexible Jumper Strap: Flexible flat conductor, 480 strands of 30 gauge bare copper wire;

3/4" wide, 9-1/2" long; 48.250 CM. Protect braid with copper bolt hole ends with holes sized for 3/8 dia. bolts.

3. Electrical Grounding Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical

grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. All non-metallic conduits and ducts shall have grounding conductors as noted on the drawings or required by NEC.

4. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates,

connectors, terminals and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturer for indicated applications.

D. Ground Rods and Plate:

1. Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" dia. x 10'.

E. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable

insulating tubing, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING



A. General: Install electrical grounding systems as indicated on the drawings, in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure grounding protection complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, NESC, and NEMA standards for installation of grounding systems and devices. All non-metallic conduits and ducts shall have grounding conductors as noted on the drawings or required by NEC.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system and

ground-fault protection devices with other work. C. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical

conductivity and circuit integrity. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. The equipment ground (green conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground non-current carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to the system.

B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point for interconnection of the equipment

grounding system and the service grounding electrode Conductor.

C. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral bar, in switchboard, panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors. The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in switchboard or a separately mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure of other types of equipment. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment grounding bars as required for the termination of equipment grounding conductors. In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all three-phase spares and spaces.

D. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection, provide ground

bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. Install grounding conductor in each nonmetallic conduit or duct and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground conductor. Those raceways used for telephone, sound, or low-voltage signals do not require a grounding conductor. All conduits terminating at communication backboards shall be provided with grounding bushings.

E. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor

for each single or three-phase feeder and each branch circuit with a three-phase protective device. Provide a separate green insulated equipment ground conductor for single phase branch circuits where indicated on the drawings. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor.

F. Devices: Where a branch circuit ground conductor is not available, install a minimum No. 12 green

insulated equipment bonding conductor. Bond conductor from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground terminal of all receptacles. This will be required regardless of receptacle being approved for application without separate bond conductor.



G. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from each separate starter through the conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on the motor.

H. SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS: Transformers creating separately derived distribution

systems shall utilize the equipment ground bars in the transformer enclosure for both secondary equipment ground and secondary neutral ground. A separate grounding conductor shall be extended to a made electrode consisting of not less than twenty feet of #4 minimum bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of the nearest exterior concrete foundation footing in direct contact with the earth. Bond this footing ground to the other elements of the grounding electrode system with a conductor equal to the service ground conductor.

3.4 SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. General: The service grounding system is provided for the AC service neutral ground and shall be

installed in complete accord with NEC and local electrical code requirements. Current return conductors shall not be used for equipment grounding. Neutral bars are not to be bonded to the enclosures of panelboards, etc. Except for separately derived systems, the neutral conductors shall be grounded only in the main service equipment.

B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point in the main service equipment by interconnecting the insulated neutral bus and service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Neutral Bars: Provide an insulated neutral bar, separate from the uninsulated equipment ground

bar, in all panelboards, except for separately derived systems.

3.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Two service ground electrodes shall be utilized. One shall be the main cold water metallic water piping system and the other shall be a made electrode consisting of not less than twenty feet of #3/0 minimum bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of a concrete foundation footing which is in direct contact with the earth (NEC 250-81c). Bond service ground conductor to the made electrode in footing and building steel with Cadweld connections or approved equal. Make the connections to the cold water pipe inside the building at the point of water service entrance.

3.6 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. The grounding conductors for both service ground electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized in accordance with NEC 250-94(a) including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors shall be continuous without joint or splice and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the conductor at each end. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors with insulation equivalent to the insulation on the associated phase conductor, but not less than Type THW. The equipment grounding conductor or straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder serves a series of panelboards or transformers, the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuous without splices. All connections shall be available for inspection and maintenance.

B. Connections: Clean surfaces thoroughly to bare metal before applying ground lugs or clamps.

Where galvanizing is removed from metal it shall be painted or touched up with "Galvanox", or equal. All grounding system connections which are made in inaccessible locations, i.e. underground, within concrete slabs, shall be made with Cadweld connections or approved equal.



3.7 TESTING

A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding system, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester (meggar) at the service ground bar and submit a written report to the Architect/Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final electrical punch list. Indicate the measured resistance and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made. The service shall not be energized if the test shows more than 25 ohms. Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 25 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 25 ohms or less by driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION


SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0529 - 1

SECTION 26 0529 – SUPPORTING DEVICES


A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards. B. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose

specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of

equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors.

2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips.

3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts.

5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts.

6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.


SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0529 - 2

2.2 STEEL CHANNEL

A. Manufacturer:

1. Unistrut.

2. B-Line.


B. Description: Painted steel.

2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS

A. Manufacturer:

1. B-Line.

2. Caddy.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon

head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch

(25 mm) off wall. I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in

hollow partitions.

END OF SECTION


ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 0530 - 1

SECTION 26 0530 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following:

1. Outlet boxes

2. Junction boxes

3. Pull boxes

4. Floor Boxes

5. Bushings

6. Locknuts

7. Knockout closures


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514-Series, and UL 886

pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/ Pub No.'s OS1, OS2

and Pub 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports. D. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of FS W-C-586,

"Electrical Cast Metal Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies and Entrance Caps". 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on electrical boxes and fittings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS

A. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with thread screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding.

B. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including

box support mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements of individual wiring situations.

C. Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel non-gangable device boxes, of

shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with cable-size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps, and for equipment type grounding.

D. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for each installation,

including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations.

E. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 2-1/8 inches deep except where shallower

boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture and power shall be not less than 4 inches square.

F. Outlet boxes for various uses shall be Appleton boxes, or equal in quality and function of the

following order; Appleton nos. listed first, universal numbers listed in parenthesis: 1. In standard partitions and suspended ceilings for lighting fixture installations where 3/4"

conduits are employed, #40D3/4 (#54l7l 3/4) boxes shall be used; for 1/2" conduits #40D1/2 (#54171 1/2) shall be used.

2. In standard partitions and suspended ceiling areas where conduits of 1" size or greater are

employed, #4SD1 (#52171-1) boxes having a depth of 2-1/8" shall be used. 3. Wall switch and convenience outlets in standard partitions and where 3/4" conduits are

employed, #4SD 3/4 (#52171-3/4) boxes shall be used; for 1/2" conduits #4SD 1/2 (#52171-1/2) boxes shall be used.

4. Outlet boxes with two switches connected to different phases of 277 volt circuit shall have

an insulated barrier between the switches. This contractor shall verify the availability of barriers to fit switch boxes prior to commencement of work.



5. In thin partitions measuring 3-1/2" or less and where 3/4" conduits are employed, #4S 3/4 (#52151 3/4) boxes shall be used; for 1/2" conduits #4S 1/2 (52151 1/2) boxes shall be used.

6. All wall or bracket outlets involve the use of (#54171) boxes with 3/8" no-bolt fixture

studs. 7. Voices, Data, Video outlets shall be as detailed on the plans and described in Section

16741.

G. The following requirements shall apply to exposed as well as concealed conduit systems. When "gang" arrangements of outlets are employed, 2-3/4" deep "gang" boxes shall be used. These "gang" boxes shall have dimensions which are not smaller than those shown in the following table. Number in Gang Size 3 4 - 1/2" X 8- 5/8" 4 4 - 1/2" X 10- 1/2" 5 4 - 1/2" X 12- 1/4" 6 4 - 1/2" X 14" 7 4 - 1/2" X 16" 8 4 - 1/2" X 17- 3/4" Where "gang" boxes are located in woodwork or in wooden partitions, the depth of the boxes (shall) may be reduced to 1 - 3/4"

H. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal raintight outlet wiring boxes, of

types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit,

I. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes with

screw on covers; of types, shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

J. Terminal Cabinets: Junction boxes called for to be used as terminal cabinets for special systems

(Security, Fire Alarm) shall be of the NEMA Type I, surface mounting minimum 16 gauge steel thickness as manufactured by Circle A-W Products or approved equal. Boxes shall be provided with a ¾” plywood thick backboard sized for full area of box wall mounting surface where noted on the Drawings. Furnish with hinged cover. Furnish terminal blocks where required or noted on the drawings for all wire splicing or terminations, Kulka 672 or equal in quality and construction. Number of terminal blocks shall be as required for all wires in terminal cabinets plus 50% spare.

K. Floor Boxes: Provide Carlon or Equal PVC rectangular floor boxes as indicated. Stamped steel

floor boxes may be used above the ground floor. L. Floor box device accessories shall be as noted on Wiring Device Section 26 27 26. M. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit

respective locations and installation, constructed with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable



covers, and corrosion-resistant screws. N. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion resistant punched steel box

knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway work. C. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. D. Provide knockout closures to cap all unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. E. Install electrical boxes and conduit bodies in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to

enclosed electrical wiring. F. Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 6" (150 mm) horizontal

separation.

G. Avoid installing aluminum products in concrete. H. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. I. Boxes shall be square and flush with finished surfaces and suitably anchored in place. The front

edges of the boxes or plaster rings shall be flush with the finished wall or ceiling line or if installed in walls and ceilings of combustible construction, not more than 1/4 inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axis of devices vertical, unless specifically noted otherwise.

J. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster rings. A multiple of box

extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Rough-in installations which require box extensions shall be abandoned and the rough-in work redone. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work.

K. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. L. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in

difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface.

M. Fasten boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure.

N. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. Where several feeders pass through a common



pullbox, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

O. Splices in switch boxes shall be kept to a minimum. P. On all ceiling outlets involving fixture hanging from boxes, 3/8" no-bolt fixture studs shall be used

for light load and 1/2" no-bolt fixture studs shall be used for heavy loads.

Q. Where an atmosphere laden with moisture exists, Type FD Series Unilet Boxes shall be used with standard devices. The covers employed shall be adapted for the particular application involved. In such cases, brass screws shall be used and due provision shall be made in all cases, for the escape of any condensate which might accumulate.

S. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall mounted outlet box shall mean the height from

the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile, block or brick construction, mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint to the mounting height indicated. Any change in height made by the Contractor shall not place the box out of the range of acceptable height to comply with ADA. Verify with the Architect. Once mounting height is adjusted because of mortar bed joint, all similar wiring devices within the room or within view shall be adjusted accordingly.

T. Wall Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the

centers of the columns are clear for future installation or partitions. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on Architectural drawings, unless locations are shown otherwise because of sidelites, and approved by the Architect.

U. Pull Boxes: Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum

length of conduit runs and maximum number of bends. Conduit runs with not more than two ninety degree bends shall not exceed 200 feet.

V. Grounding: Upon completion of installation, properly ground electrical boxes and demonstrate

compliance with requirements.

W. Identification: All junction and pull boxes above the ceiling shall be labeled as to the circuits contained. Blank steel covers on 4 square boxes may be labeled with permanent black marker, hand written with panel name and circuit numbers. Larger boxes may have handwritten labeling if neatly performed.

X. Grounding: Upon completion of installation work, properly ground electrical boxes and

demonstrate compliance with requirements. Y. Identification: Identify junction and pull boxes installed for fire alarm wiring painting red. Paint

box and cover.

END OF SECTION


RACEWAYS 26 0535 - 1

SECTION 26 0535 - RACEWAYS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.


section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways for (electrical wiring) 600v and below electrical circuits, control wiring, Intrusion and Fire Alarm. Raceways intended for communication systems (voice, data, video) shall be installed by Section 27 00 00. Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

2. Flexible metal conduit.

3. Liquidtight flexible conduit.

4. Underground plastic utilities duct.

5. Rigid metal conduit

6. Rigid nonmetallic conduit

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections.

B. Product Data for the following products:

1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Flexible conduits and fittings.

3. PVC conduits and fittings.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways.



C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or CSA.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with other Work, including metal and concrete deck installation, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide assembly of conduit, tubing or duct, and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, straps, bushings, expansion joints, hangers and other components and accessories as needed for a complete system. Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2".

B. Each length of rigid/IMC conduit shall have both ends threaded. The extremities shall, moreover, be

reamed to remove all burrs and sharp edges. Each length of conduit shall be marked with the name and trademark of the manufacturer and the stamp of approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

C. Where shown on the plans or specifically called for in the specifications, electrical conductors shall

be installed in hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit or IMC, as manufactured by Pittsburgh Standard Conduit Company, or equal. Exposed conduit in damp OUTDOOR locations shall be rigid steel conduit or IMC. If EMT conduit is used outdoors as part of the new construction, it shall be REMOVED wherever found and replaced with rigid steel conduit. Each length of conduit shall be provided with one coupling attached and the threads of the end of the conduits having no coupling shall be protected by use of suitable thread protectors. All couplings and other fittings such as bends or elbows shall be protected against corrosion in the same manner in which the conduit itself is protected. All bends for conduit of 1-1/4" or larger shall either be factory manufactured elbows or be made by the use of a bending machine meeting the approval of Architect. Under no circumstances shall any bend be installed if the conduit from which it is fabricated is injured in any manner in the course of, or by, the bending process. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any field bend shall not be less than the recommendation of the National Electrical Code. Under no circumstances shall the internal cross sectional area of any conduit be appreciably reduced by any bending process.

D. Rigid steel conduit, IMC and EMT fittings shall be either steel or malleable iron only. E. EMT connectors and couplings shall be of the steel set screw or watertight threaded compression

type, having steel gland nuts. Indenter or threadless type fittings are prohibited and shall be removed from the job wherever found. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

F. 1/2" and 3/4" trade size conduits may be installed in concrete slabs, as near the center of the slab as

possible. Material shall be IMC, rigid or PVC.

G. Conduits installed in direct contact with the earth, except where PVC is used, shall be rigid galvanized steel, field spirally wrapped (half-lapped) with one layer of 1" wide 3M Scotchrap #50 plastic tape with a 50 percent overlap, including all joints or couplings, or shall be coated with a



bonded 20 mil minimum thickness PVC, permanently fused at the factory, Pittsburgh Standard Co., "Plasti-Bond", or equal. Contractor shall patch with Scotchrap tape all holes or abrasions to conduit tape wrapping which expose the metal conduit surface. All buried wrapped or coated conduit shall be checked by Owner's duly authorized representative prior to covering up with fill. Branch circuit and feeder conduit runs when direct buried may be PVC schedule 40. The Contractor has have the option of PVC conduit or rigid metal tape wrapped conduit. EMT conduit is not acceptable for burial applications. If PVC conduit is used, transition to rigid metal tape wrapped conduit shall be made before beginning sweep for conduit stub-up. Metal conduit must be wrapped throughout buried portion, including risers.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Contractor to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.

B. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium plated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Not acceptable on this project. D. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1

E. Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) may be used in lieu of

rigid conduit, but only where permitted by 2002 NEC, and with manufacturer's recommended fittings. Threading and bending of IMC shall be with approved equipment for the purpose and as recommended by the manufacturer of the raceway. Threadless fittings shall not be permitted for rigid or IMC.

F. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. Steel tubing, in lieu of rigid or IMC conduit,

may be used in sizes up to and including 3 inches in all interior work, except that it shall not be used in concrete, underground, in any damp or outdoor locations, or in any locations where there is a likelihood of mechanical injury.

G. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, aluminum, not acceptable. H. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, with a separate grounding bond wire installed in the flex in addition

to other wires. I. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Either steel or malleable iron only, with insulated throats.

J. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal

conduit; constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside; coated with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. To be UL labeled Sealtite type UA or Liquidtite type LA.

K. Liquid tight flexible conduit fittings shall be provided with threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon

or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "O" ring seat.



2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS

A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper section determined by Contractor to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.

B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. C. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and

material. D. Conduit, Tubing and Duct Accessories: Types, sizes, and materials complying with manufacturer's

published product information. Mate and match accessories with raceway. 2.4 CONDUIT BODIES

A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for

threaded raceways. C. Conduit Bodies 1 Inch and Smaller: Use bodies with compression-type EMT connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD

A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods: 1. Exposed: IMC or rigid metal conduit. 2. Underground: IMC, (or) rigid metal conduit, or PVC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or

electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment: liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 4. Indoors or Outdoors: Connection to vibrating equipment and hydraulic, pneumatic, or

electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment in moist or humid location or corrosive atmosphere, or where subject to water spray or dripping oil, grease, or water: liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:

1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic or

electric solenoid or motor-operated equipment: flexible metal conduit. 2. Exposed: electrical metallic tubing or rigid metallic conduit.



4. Concealed: electrical metallic tubing, or rigid metallic conduit.

4. Underground: IMC, rigid or PVC.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install electrical raceways for all wiring circuits in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows:

B. Conceal Conduit and EMT, unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Run all conduits in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. On exposed systems, support shall be provided at intervals of 6 feet. On concealed conduits, support shall be provided at intervals of no more than 8 feet. No feeder conduit run shall be longer than 80 feet between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices unless there are no direction changes, and only a straight-in-line pull of wire is involved. In such straight-in-line runs between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices, a run not to exceed 120 feet in length may be made.

C. Elevation of Raceway: Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping to the fullest

extent possible. D. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within

raceways. All ends of the conduit shall be properly reamed to remove rough edges and whenever a conduit enters a box or other fitting, it shall be securely fastened by the use of a locknut inside and outside of the box or fitting. An approved bushing shall be installed on the ends of all conduit in such a manner as to protect the wire from abrasion. Completed raceways shall be inspected; inspect interiors of raceways, remove burrs, moisture, dirt and construction debris.

E. Support raceways rigidly by means of straps or hangers best suited for the work. Conduit shall not

be supported from ceiling support system. Multiple runs of conduits shall be racked on trapeze hangers. All support materials shall be rustproof. Perforated tape or wire shall not be used. SUPPORTS SHALL COMPLY WITH NEW MEXICO ELECTRICAL CODE.

F. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. Seal

raceways after installation to prevent accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign materials. Conduit in which such accumulation occurs shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect or replaced.

G. Conduit crossing expansion joints shall be provided with suitable expansion fitting. H. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of

bends is not visible above the finished slab. Conduit crushed or otherwise deformed shall not be installed and shall be removed from the job site without delay.

I. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise

indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.

J. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the



use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings except as otherwise indicated.

K. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the

type of building construction and obstructions, except as otherwise indicated.

L. Raceways embedded in slabs: For slab or grade install in middle third of the slab thickness, on other floors of a multistory building install on metal jack and leave at least 1 inch concrete cover. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Where nonmetallic conduit is used, raceways must be converted to rigid steel conduit or IMC before rising above floor. EMT conduit shall not be installed in contact with the earth or in concrete slabs.

M. All non-metallic conduit or duct runs shall have a ground bonding conductor, size as noted or

required by NEC. The bond or equipment served shall be bonded to grounding conductor to provide a good ground return path to service panel.

N. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and

follow the surface contours as much as practical. Paint conduit that will be exposed to the public. Paint shall match surface color.

O. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from

the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases provided field bends for parallel raceways.

P. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Where

joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding busings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

Q. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool.

R. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to

enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.

S. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears

against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use no. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic

line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Identify each terminus of pull wire with linen tags marked with complete information as to service and location of the terminus of the line/wire.

U. Telephone (and Signal) System Raceways are part of communication systems. Install per Section 16741.



V. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate

fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of

refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces. 2. Where required by the NEC.

W. Conduit Stub-up Through Roof: All conduits up through roof shall be properly sealed. Where applicable Contractor shall provide special adapters designed for the specific type of roofing system. See the drawings for special details and instructions for this specific purpose.

X. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum of 6 ft.) of flexible conduit for recessed and

semirecessed lighting fixtures, for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

Y. Conduits above acoustical "lay-in" ceilings shall be anchored to the building structure and not on

the ceiling or ceiling support wires. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure. Junction boxes shall be installed on the structural members and flexible conduit, extended down to light fixtures, length not to exceed 6 ft., and in accordance with NEC Article 410-67.

Z. Do not install aluminum conduit. AA. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with that material.

Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. BB. Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuits other than parallel wiring of fixtures. CC. Fire Barriers: Contractor shall be responsible for sealing all conduit penetrations through fire rated

walls and ceilings. The seal shall be acceptable to Architect and maintain the integrity of the wall, ceiling fire rating. 3M brand fire barrier caulk #CP 25 and putty #303 are considered acceptable for this purpose. Refer to Architectural drawings for these locations.


A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris.

END OF SECTION


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1

SECTION 26 0553 – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION


A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose

specified and shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. B. Locations:

1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. Provide new labels on all

equipment.

2. Communication cabinets.

C. Letter Size:

1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.

D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background.


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 APPLICATION

A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Color:

1. 208 Volt System: Black, Red, Blue, White, Green.

END OF SECTION


PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1

SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of panelboard, and enclosure work, including cabinets is indicated by drawings and schedules, and as specified herein.

B. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following:

1. (Service entrance panelboards)

2. Power-distribution panelboards

3. Lighting and appliance panelboards

C. Refer to other Division 26 sections for wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work

required in conjunction with installation of panelboards and enclosures. D. Wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways required in conjunction with the

installation of panelboards and enclosures are specified in other Division 26 sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately

scaled layout of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground-fault circuit interrupters, and accessories.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for panelboards showing connections to electrical

power feeders and distribution branches. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of panelboards and enclosures, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on

projects utilizing panelboards similar to those required for this project.



C. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority

having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 as applicable to installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures.

D. Contractor shall comply with panel board clearance requirements, NEC 110-16 (a), regarding the

30" work space. Conflicts with local inspection authorities regarding this shall be total responsibility of Contractor.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric Panelboards", and UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide panelboard units which are UL-listed and labeled.

F. Special-Use Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special use, with appropriate UL

markings which indicate that they are suitable for special type of use/application. G. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment (1000 volt maximum)"; Pub/No. PB 1, "Panelboards", and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards rated 600 volts or less."

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with installation of wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of panelboard and enclosure):

1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.

2. General Electric Company

3. Square "D" Company

4. Siemens

B. No other manufacturer's products will be considered for installation on this project.

2.2 PANELBOARDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where more than one type of component meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL, and established industry standards for applications indicated. Panels to have bolt-on type circuit breakers only.



B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Construct unit for connecting feeder at top or bottom of panel to suit job conditions. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98-percent conductivity, and full-sized neutral bus. Use of aluminum bus bars will not be permitted. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide molded-case (main and) branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide a copper bare uninsulated grounding bar suitable for bolting to enclosure. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, and which mate and match properly with enclosures. Provide Square D I-Line class equipment, or equal. Distribution panelboards shall be limited to one section as noted on the drawings.

C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance

panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top or bottom of panel to suit job conditions; equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar or 200% Neutral bar as noted with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicated when tripped. Use of aluminum bus bars will not be permitted. Where multiple-pole circuit breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide a copper bare uninsulated ground bar suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, and which match and mate properly with panelboards.

D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes (20" width

minimum) and NEMA types as indicated, code-gauge minimum 16-gauge thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable indicating trim clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed door hinges and door swings as indicated. All panelboards shall be of the "door-in-door" construction. In addition to the requirement for door-in-door construction, the door-in-door assembly must be bolted/supported to/by the panelboard enclosure (can). Those door assemblies which require support from the building wall construction are not acceptable and will not be approved. Equip with interior circuit-directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor. Design enclosure for surface or recessed mounting as required. Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboard, and which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.

E. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers of frame

sizes, characteristics, and ratings including RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault-current limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 deg. C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.

F. Termination provisions on all circuit breakers installed shall have wire temperature ratings of 60o

and 75o C. Circuit breakers rated 125 amperes or less shall be marked as being suitable for 60o/75o C. wire. All 15A and 20A, 1P breakers shall be UL listed as SWD (switching duty) rated.



G. Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to

cartridge and plug time-delay type fuses, ground-fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Contractor shall verify that proper clearance between panelboards and other surfaces is maintained to comply to NEC requirements. Location of panelboards as shown provides, base on information available, compliance with NEC requirements. Verify spacing based on equipment supplied and on actual field conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS

A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B.

C. Coordinate installation of panelboard and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. D. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, insuring that they are permanently and

mechanically secure.

E. Insert fuses, if any, of ratings indicated, within installed panelboards. F. Provide properly wired electrical connections for panelboards within enclosures. G. Panelboards shall have neatly typed circuit directories behind clear plastic. Handwritten directories

will not be accepted. Identify circuits by room numbers. Room numbers shall be those finally selected by the Owner; not necessarily those given on the contract documents. "Spares" and "Spaces" shall be indicated with erasable pencil, not typed.

H. The information presented on panelboard schedules contained on the drawings for individual

circuits regarding load served is not necessarily acceptable for final version of panel circuit directory. Each directory entry should designate type of load and location of load; i.e., Lights, Room 201; Outlets, Room 116; Lights & Outlets, Rooms 211 & 212. This contractor shall verify final room name/designation of owner and fill in circuit directory as described herein. Panelboard installation will not be considered finished until this requirement is complied with.

I. Panel Identification:



1. Electrical equipment to be identified with nameplates includes: Distribution Panels and Lighting Panelboards.

2. Nameplates shall be as required in specification Section 16000. Nameplates shall be

mounted on outside surface of panelboard door about 3 inches from top of door and centered in width of door.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboard enclosures as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.


A. Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.

B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and phase-

to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short-circuits.


A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

B. Provide High Voltage labeling as required.

END OF SECTION


MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 2419 - 1

SECTION 26 2419 – MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS




section making reference to motor and circuit disconnect switches specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The extent of motor and circuit disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. The types of motor and circuit disconnect switches in this section include the following:

1. Equipment disconnects

2. Appliance disconnects

3. Motor-circuit disconnects


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches.

B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches which have been UL

listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Publ. No. KS1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or equal (for each type of switch):

1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.

2. General Electric Co.



3. Square D Company

B. Motor and circuit disconnects larger than 60A shall be side hinged.

2.2 FABRICATED SWITCHES

A. General-Duty Disconnect Switches: General duty switches are not acceptable on this project. Only heavy duty switches shall be installed as specified in this section. General duty switches erroneously installed on job shall be replaced with heavy duty switches of type required wherever found.

B. Heavy-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet steel enclosed

safety switches, of the types, sizes, and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible type, rated for ampacity of circuit and system voltage as a minimum where noted on drawings. Switches shall be of pole configuration required for application with a solid neutral if needed; incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; so constructed that switch blades are visible in "OFF" position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in the "OFF" position; construct current carrying parts of positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Where noted on the contract documents, provide non-fuse disconnect switches of the same class construction listed above.

C. Provide rain-tight switches for outside locations and where noted on the drawings, or where

required by code enforcing authorities. D. Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches, as noted on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Install: Motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable

work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within

sight of the controller position unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide nameplates on disconnect switches. Nameplates shall be as required in specification

Section 16000. E. Disconnects installed over the equipment nameplate shall be moved.


A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise



indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.

END OF SECTION


CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 2716 - 1

SECTION 26 2716 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES


A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories.


A. Section 26 05 29 - Supporting Devices. B. Firestopping

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW – None Required. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hoffman. B. Circle A-W. C. Wiegmann.



D. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES

A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R steel enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with

white enamel.

D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.3 CABINETS

A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Box Size: As indicated on drawings. C. Backboard: Provide 3/4-inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte

white.

D. Fronts: Steel door with concealed hinge, and flush lock. Finish with gray baked enamel. E. Knockouts: Pre-punched. F. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. G. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.

2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Siemon.

2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01685.

B. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. C. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors,

rated 600 volts. D. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with

tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. E. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.




A. Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

C. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner

under the provisions of Section 26 05 29.

D. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.2 CLEANING

A. Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

END OF SECTION


WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1

SECTION 26 2726 – WIRING DEVICES



B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section and is part of each Division 26

section making reference to wiring devices specified herein. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles

2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

3. Plugs

4. Plug Connections

5. Snap Switches

6. Wall Plates

7. Floor Boxes

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified. B. All wiring devices shall be by the same manufacturer unless authorized by Architect. Unauthorized

mixing of device brands is unacceptable. C. Samples: The Contractor shall submit a sample of the standard single pole switch and of the

standard 15 Amp duplex convenience outlet as part of submittals. All wiring devices shall be by the same manufacturer unless authorized by Architect. Mixing of device brands is unacceptable.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes.

1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code".

B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards.

1.5 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING



A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received

final finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or equal (for each type of wiring device): 1. General Electric Co.

2. Harvey Hubbell, Inc.

3. Pass and Seymour, Inc.

4. Bryant Electric Div., Westinghouse Corp.

5. Arrow Hart

6. Leviton

8. Lutron

9. Carlon

2.2 WIRING DEVICES

A. General: Provide wiring devices in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and comply with NEMA WD1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Contractor to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with NEC and NEMA standards for wiring devices. Provide ivory color devices and stainless steel wall plates except as otherwise indicated. Verify color selections with the Architect.

B. Receptacles:

1. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in

accordance with the NEMA Publication WD1 and UL 498. Fire-resistant, non-absorptive, hot-welded, phenolic composition or equal bodies and based with metal plaster ears (integral with the supporting members). Single or duplex as shown or noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong. Convenience outlets shall be installed with grounding pin connection for plugs at top (outlets installed vertically). All outlets not installed with ground post connection point on top shall be repositioned to meet this requirement.

2. Grounding type: All receptacles shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal

equipment ground screw and shall be connected to green circuit ground conductor. Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke.

3. Duplex convenience outlets, rated 20 amps, 125 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire, NEMA 5-20R,



specification grade, back or side wiring, shall be Hubbell #5362-I, Pass & Seymour #5362-I, General Electric GE 5362-2 or Bryant 5362I.

4. Isolated ground duplex convenience outlets, rated 15 amps, 125 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire,

NEMA 5-15R, back or side wiring, shall be Hubbell #IG-5262, Pass & Seymour #IG6200, General Electric GE 8200-IG or Bryant #5262IG.

5. Weather proof outlets at grade shall be GFCI receptacles installed in recessed “Taymac

Masque” or equal covered recessed receptacle box. Contractor shall install Taymac #72204 or equal with GFCI outlet. Taymac #72204 or equal consists of metal box, plastic extension ring and gasketed outlet bucket with cover.

6. Weather proof outlets on roof for NEC 210-63 rule shall be GFCI outlet in FS cast metal

box with Taymac #20510 or equal deep cover.

C. Ground Fault Interrupter Outlets: 1. The ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles, rated 15 amps, 125 volts, 2 pole, 3

wire, NEMA 5-15R, shall be UL listed (UL 498 and UL 943 Class A) and shall comply with ANSI C73.11. GFCI receptacles shall have the "feed-through" feature to provide GFCI protection to receptacles connected downstream on same circuit in rooms indicated. Otherwise, they shall not be down stream feed through. The GFCI shall operate in the 4 - 6 milliamp range. The GFCI receptacles shall be Hubbell #GF-5262I, Pass & Seymour #1591-F-I, or Bryant #GFR52FTI. Receptacles shall be furnished with matching stainless steel (430) device wall coverplate.

D. Floor Boxes:

1. Specification 26 05 30 – Floor boxes shall be Carlon or Equal rectangular PVC box. One

gang box shall be CAT #E976RFB, with 2 gang and 3 gang boxes with add on partitions. Covers shall have floor material inserts to match adjacent surfaces. In the floor box add electrical outlet as called for on the plans. Where 2 or more floor boxes are shown in the same vicinity, they shall be ganged together.

E. Switches:

1. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler-toggle) shall be of the AC

general use type fully rated 20 amperes minimum at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 20, NEMA Stds. Publ. No. WD1, and further requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single pole, 3-way, or 4-way of the maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of phenolic, urea or melamine. Fiber, paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or cover. Silver or silver alloy contacts. AC 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA publication WD1 and shall be as follows or an Architect approved equal, unless otherwise noted.

2. Single pole switches, rated 20A, 120-277 volts, shall be Hubbell #1221-I, General Electric

#5951-2G, Pass & Seymour #20AC1-I or Bryant 4901I.



3. Single pole switch with pilot light shall be spec. grade red lighted handle, rated 20 amps,

120V, Hubbell #1221-PL, General Electric #SP121-8G, Pass & Seymour #20AC1-RPL or Bryant #4901 PLR 120. The 277 volt switches shall be Hubbell #1227-PL7, General Electric #SP122-8G, Pass & Seymour #20AC1-RPL or Bryant #4901PLR 277.

4. Three-way switches, rated 20A, 120-277 volts, shall be Hubbell #1223-I, Bryant #4903I,

Pass & Seymour #20AC3-I or General Electric #5953-2G. 5. Four-way switches, rated 20A, 120-277 volts, shall be Hubbell #1224-I, Bryant 4904I, Pass

& Seymour #20AC4-I or General Electric #5954-2G. 6. Weatherproof switches shall include the type of snap switch indicated on the drawings and

specified herein, enclosed with a Crouse-Hinds #DS 181 cover and gasket mounted in an FS cast box. Substitutions must be Architect approved. Flip top covers exposing switch handle to rain are not acceptable. Orientation of the cover must be vertical.

F. Dimmer Switches:

1. Dimmer switches, incandescent slider, solid state type, 1500 watts at 120 volts, Lutron #N-

1500 or Architect approved equal. 2. Fluorescent dimmer switches, slider, solid state type, 277V, line voltage compatible with

Advance Mark X or Equal electronic ballast.

2.3 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wall plates: single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plate color to match wiring devices except as otherwise indicated. Conform to requirements of "Electrical Identification." Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

B. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel. C. Material and Finish: steel plate, galvanized. D. Engraving: Wall plates located in finished areas which would require identification shall be

engraved stainless steel plates. All lettering shall be 1/8" minimum in height, nine characters per inch and filled with black paint. Identification wording/lettering shall be as noted on the drawings and shall be centered on coverplate.

E. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application. F. Wall plates covering flush boxes in CMU walls shall have oversize plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION



A. Wiring device locations show are appropriate. Contractor shall adjust lateral locations shown up to 18” to accommodate final room layouts. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown on the plans to accommodate changes in door swings or to clear other interferences that may arise from job construction details as well as modification within room spaces. The Contractor shall check these conditions throughout the entire job and shall notify the Architect of discrepancies as they may occur before proceeding with the installation of the work to verify the modifications, if any.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as

necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building materials, dirt and debris.

C. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces. D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. Switches shall be mounted 44" and

convenience outlets 17" minimum, center of box above the finished floor level except as otherwise specified on the drawings. Align devices and plates horizontally and vertically.

E. Wall boxes shall be set in advance of the wall construction, shall be blocked in place and secured.

All wall boxes shall be set flush with the finished building construction. Contractor shall vacuum clean all wiring device boxes.

F. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as necessary to

interface installation of wiring devices with other work. G. Delay installation of wall plates until after painting work is completed. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with other trades the actual installation of his

outlet boxes in walls. The wall building material (cinder block, brick, sheetrock or whatever) shall provide an even trim around outlet boxes not exceeding a 1/4" gap. The device coverplate should be able to cover up wall openings around outlet boxes. Wherever an outlet box installation fails to comply with the above listed condition, the Contractor shall arrange to have the problem corrected. Caulking, spackling material or any other sealer to be used shall be kept out of the outlet box area.

I. Wiring device yokes shall be installed in physical contact with the plaster ring. Spiral wound bare

wire supports to act as spacers between plaster extension ring/box and device yokes are not acceptable. Where condition occurs, the plaster ring/box shall be replaced as required to provide the proper contact.

J. Device coverplates for each and every device shall be furnished and installed by this contractor.

K. Isolated ground type convenience outlets shall not share neutrals or ground conductors with any

other branch circuits.



L. Ground fault protected receptacle branch circuit conductors shall not be routed in conduits containing other branch circuit conductors, nor will neutral conductors be shared with other circuits.

M. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

N. Set floor boxes flush with final finish floor. Tie to rebar as appropriate to prohibit box from moving

during concrete pour. Locate box as directed in the field. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES

A. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise the Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scorched by faulty plugs.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Provide electrically continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise noted.


A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six times.

B. Test ground fault interrupters operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance

with manufacturer recommendations.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 26 5100 - 1

SECTION 26 5100 – INTERIOR LUMINAIRES


A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts. E. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply. F. Lamps. G. Luminaire accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps – Classification of Beam Patterns.

B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple

Supply Type). D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Submittals for project closeout. B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product.



1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish Products as scheduled. Light fixtures on this job cannot be substituted. B. Provide a disconnecting means either internal or external for all fluorescent luminares that contain

double ended lamps and contain ballasts that can be serviced in place. 2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Furnish products as scheduled. 2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Furnish products as scheduled. 2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Advance.

2. Magnatek. 3. Materials: Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electronic ballast, suitable for lamps specified. C. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. D. Source Quality Control: Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast

Manufacturers, Inc. 2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY



A. Manufacturers:

1. Bodine, Model B50.

2. Materials: Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of

fluorescent luminaire.

C. Lamp Ratings: One F32CW lamp providing 1100 lumens, minimum.

2.6 LAMPS

A. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers:

1. Sylvania. 2. Philips. 3. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. Refer to Section 16000 for substitutions and product

options. C. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C78.379.


A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.

B. Support 2 x 4 foot luminaires independent of ceiling framing.

C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.

D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and

with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure.

F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.

G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory

requirements for fire rating.



H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.

I. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled.

J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

K. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions within luminaire.

L. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

M. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection, testing, and adjusting. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and

operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as required.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. E. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 0000 - 1

SECTION 27 0000 – COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS


A. This specification section covers the installation requirements for the conduit system to install the voice, data and video wiring only. All other conduit required for power wiring, controls wiring, special system wiring, etc. shall conform to appropriate Sections. The Communication System may consist of fiber optic, coaxial and copper wiring. The systems may include but are not limited to the following:

1. Conduit system for voice system cabling.

2. Conduit system for data system cabling.

3. Conduit system for (video imaging system) cabling.

4. A complete conduit pathway is not a requirement of this project. A backbone raceway system

is required. Provide underground conduits as shown, conduits stubbed out of the Comm. room and conduit stub-ups out of wall and floor data outlets.


A. Section 26 05 33- Raceways. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. EIA/TIA-568 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. B. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces. All

conduit installations shall comply with EIA/TIA – 568 and 569. C. EIA/TIA-TSB72 - Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Contractor shall furnish and install all communication system conduits, junction boxes and sleeves in locations as shown on the drawings and herein specified.

B. Contractor shall install all low voltage CAT 5e/6, CAT 3, coaxial and fiber optic cable.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS



A. Conform to requirements of EIA/TIA and NFPA 70. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose

specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Junction boxes for communications drops shall be a minimum 4” deep square pressed galvanized steel. Flush mount all junction boxes and plaster rings within walls.

B. Plaster rings shall be one gang, 5/8”, or as necessary. C. All conduit shall be EMT with long sweep elbows. D. All cables, except as noted, will be installed by the Contractor. Cable will be furnished by the

Owner.

2.2 Communications Pathway Requirements For Voice, Data and Video Drops:

A. Install the number of cable drops as listed on the drawings. B. These cables will be run and dropped as directed by the drawings in the pathways shown. C. Installation of cables through ceiling cavities without conduit pathways shown shall be by

installation of “J hooks.” Cables shall be neatly bundled. Spacing of “J hooks” shall not exceed 4’ or as required by EIA/TIA 568.569. Portions of story 3 ceiling cavity is a return air plenum and requires plenum cables. All other areas the ceiling cavity is not plenum return.

2.3 Floor Boxes:

A. Provide Carlon or Equal rectangular PVC box. Box shall be CAT # E976RFB. Provide data plate insert.

B. Raised floor boxes shall be compatible with the raised floor system specified by the Architect in the

new computer labs. Refer to detail on electrical drawings.

C. Floor boxes shall contain data boxes specified on special systems plan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Conduit installation shall conform to the minimum requirements of EIA/TIA 568 and 569. Contractor shall provide all conduits, boxes, etc. as required to properly install all Structured Cabling System wiring.

B. Contractor shall carefully and neatly install owner’s cabling. Contractor shall leave cable for make-



up at both ends. Provide 15” at outlet and 12’-0” at HUB. C. Connections at HUB and owner provided devices at outlet boxes will be by the owner.

END OF SECTION


FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3100 - 1

SECTION 28 3100 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Division 26 ELECTRICAL, with the additions and modifications specified herein. B. Section 21 10 00 Fire Sprinkler System C. Division 23 HVAC D. Division 7 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to firestopping.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The new fire alarm system for this project shall be Gamewell, Notifier or Firelite.

B. The fire alarm system shall be installed using plenum wiring where concealed. C. The fire alarm layout shown on the contract documents is a preliminary guide to the extent, type

and location of fire alarm devices that may be needed for the project. Prior to bidding, each electrical contractor shall coordinate with actual site conditions and each fire alarm subcontractor as to the full extent of the electrical rough-in that will be required for the project.

D. The fire alarm subcontractor shall prepare a submittal document for approval of the system

layout, battery calcs and product literature. Additionally they will prepare suitable submittals to NMSU FIRE DEPARTMENT for a fire alarm permit.

1.3 SCOPE

A. This work includes completion of design and providing a new, complete fire alarm as described herein and on the contract drawings for all areas of DACC B341. Include in the system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide system [s] complete and ready for operation.

B. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict

accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, except as modified herein. The system layout on the drawings shows the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations. Submit plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170. Final quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of this project. A single fire alarm control panel is indicated with several terminal cabinets.

C. Where remote fire alarm control units are needed, they shall be provided at a terminal cabinet location. Each remote fire alarm control unit shall be powered from a wiring riser specifically for



that use. Where remote fire control units are provided, equipment for notification appliances may be located in the remote fire alarm control units.

1.4 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA) FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM APP GUIDE Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges

in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems — Part 16: Sound System Control And Indicating Equipment

ISO 7240-19 (2007) Fire Detection and Alarm Systems — Part 19: Design,

Installation, Commissioning and Service of Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 170 (2012) Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols

NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2

2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3 2014) National Electrical Code

NFPA 72 (2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

NFPA 90A (2015) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 1480 (2003; Reprint Oct 2012) Standard for Speakers for Fire

Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use

UL 1638 (2001; Reprint Oct 2013) Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General Utility Signaling

UL 1971 (2002; Reprint Oct 2008) Signaling Devices for the Hearing

Impaired



UL 2017 (2008; Reprint May 2011) General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems

UL 268 (2009) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems

UL 464 (2009; Reprint Apr 2012) Standard for Audible Signal

Appliances

UL 521 (1999; Reprint May 2010) Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL 864 (2003; Reprint Aug 2012) Standard for Control Units and

Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

UL Electrical Construction (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory

UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory

1.5 DEFINITIONS

Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:

A. Interface Device

An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system.

B. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)

A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm control unit. The panel has central processing, memory, input and output terminals, and LCD, LED Display units.

C. Terminal Cabinet

A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door that terminal strips are securely mounted. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide Technical submittal literature for the equipment to be provided. B. Provide shop drawings for the intended installation. C. Provide a complete listing of addresses used for devices. D. Provide As-Built Drawings

1.7 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE

Technical data and computer software meaning technical data that relates to computer software that are specifically identified in this project, and may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions.



Descriptions shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The data package shall also include the following:

a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and capabilities.

b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation

detailing both equipment and software requirements.

c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions of the fire alarm and detection system.

d. Description of Fire Alarm Control Panel equipment operation.

e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.

f. Library of application software.

g. Operation and maintenance manuals.


Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing NMSU central station and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system. The proprietary type Supervising Station (PSS) is located in the Main Hospital on Alameda.

a. In NFPA publications referred to herein, consider advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though

the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" to mean the NMSU Fire Chief.

b. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation shall be

considered as mandatory requirements.

c. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE.

1.8.1 Qualifications 1.8.2 Design Services

Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, fire suppression systems shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an individual meeting the following conditions:

a. Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience and at least five years of current

experience in the design of the fire protection and detection systems. 1.8.3 Supervisor



Fire Alarm Technician with a minimum of 8 years of experience shall perform/supervise the installation of the fire alarm system. The Fire Alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.8.4 Technician

Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized to install and terminate fire alarm devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.8.5 Installer

Fire Alarm installer with a minimum of two years of experience utilized to assist in the installation of fire alarm devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician if properly licensed by the State of New Mexico shall be allowed to install wire, cable, and conduit and back boxes for the fire alarm system. The Fire Alarm installer shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.8.6 Test Personnel

Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire alarm devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.

1.8.7 Manufacturer's Representative

The fire alarm equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control panel. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer with necessary technical training on the system being installed.

1.8.8 Manufacturer

Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.

1.8.9 Regulatory Requirements 1.8.10 Requirements for Fire Protection Service

Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.



1.8.11 Fire Alarm

Furnish equipment that is compatible and is UL listed, FM approved, or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use. All listings by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. Submit a unique identifier for each device, including the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication of test results, and signature of the factory-trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate test reports.

1.8.12 Fire Alarm Testing Services or Laboratories

Construct fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Construction, or FM APP GUIDE.


Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Submit annotated catalog data as required in the paragraph SUBMITTAL, in table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings shall not be smaller than ISO A1. Also provide UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided.

2.1.1 Standard Products

Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM Approvals, LLC (FM), and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least two years prior to bid opening.

2.1.2 Nameplates

Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. FACP b. Automatic transmitter/transceiver



c. Battery Cabinets d. Terminal Cabinet Furnish nameplate illustrations and data to obtain approval by the Owner before installation. Obtain approval by the Owner for installation locations. Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls.

2.1.3 Keys

Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required.

2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT

All fire alarm equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards. If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays, the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and confirmation by the installing contractor. As part of the submittal documents, provide this information.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm System shall be a complete, supervised, non-coded, analog/addressable fire alarm system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864, and UL 2017. The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the control panel is reset and restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alarm mode remotely from authorized locations/users.

Submit data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 50 percent spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings. Submit a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings. Submit a complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages.

2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Voice, Textural)

a. Connect alarm initiating devices to initiating device circuits (IDC) Class "B", or to signal

line circuits (SLC) Class "A" and installed in accordance with NFPA 72.

b. Connect alarm notification appliances to notification appliance circuits (NAC) Class "A”. c. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device.

The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) is/are reset and the control panel is manually reset and restored to normal. Audible, and visual appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72 and as specified herein. Fire alarm system components requiring power, except for control panel power supplies, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.

2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features

The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:



a. The FACP shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system.

Addressable systems shall be microcomputer (microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.

b. For Class "A" or "X" circuits with conductor lengths of 3m (10 feet) or less, the

conductors shall be permitted to be installed in the same raceway in accordance with NFPA 72.

c. Provide signaling line circuits. d. Provide signaling line circuits for the network. e. Provide notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances shall

have the flash rates synchronized as required by NFPA 72. f. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery,

battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel. g. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open

condition, or ground fault (or short circuit for Class "X"). The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.

h. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the

automatic notification appliance circuits, features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output.

i. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to a UL

listed central station. j. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions

shall override trouble functions. k. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels keyboard.

Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory. l. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both

addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices. m. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of

addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously. n. Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency

control device or system, fire sprinkler system, HVAC system, etc. the addressable fire alarm relay shall be in the vicinity of the emergency control device.



o. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions: (1) Transmission of an alarm signal to the central station.

(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the control panel (FACP), LCD, LED Display

unit (VDU), and on the graphic annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator shall be by zone or circuit, and type of device.

(3) Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances.

(4) Recording of the event via electronically in the history log of the fire control system unit.

(5) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance

with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72.

(6) Release all door hold open devices

p. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, VDU, and on the graphic annunciator,

and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to a UL listed central station.

(3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the control unit.

q. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions:

(1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, VDU, and on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel.

(2) Transmission of a trouble signal to a UL listed central station.

(3) Recording of the event in the history log of the control unit.

r. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and

its indication at the FACP is 10 seconds.

s. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP is 200 seconds.

2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING 2.4.1 Valves

Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Provide each tamper switch with a separate address.



2.5 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION 2.5.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection

For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end.

2.5.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection

Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown.

2.6 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Class "B" initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, independent smoke detection systems, relays for output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED.

2.7 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to control door holders. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Class "B" notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled and is visible through the device cover plate. Control Modules shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed.

2.8 SMOKE SENSORS 2.8.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors

Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:



a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.

b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at

the FACP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.

c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the

sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber.

d. Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their

bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.

e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its

sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.

f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to

manually access the following information for each initiating device. (1) Primary status (2) Device type (3) Present average value (4) Present sensitivity selected (5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)

2.8.2 Duct Smoke Sensors

Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct. Detectors shall have a manual reset. Detectors shall be rated for required air velocities. Detectors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel.

a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct detector package shall

conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268A, and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from the fire alarm control panel.



b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place. Remote indicators shall be provided where required by NFPA 72 and these shall be provided with test and reset switches.

c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly identified

in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions specified in Section Division 23. Auxiliary contacts provide for this function shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.

d. Provide ceiling mounted remote test stations. Coordinate location with NMSU.

2.8.3 Smoke Sensor Testing

Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval. In addition to the NFPA 72 requirements, smoke detector sensitivity shall be tested during the preliminary tests.

2.9 HEAT DETECTORS 2.9.1 Heat Detectors

Heat detectors shall be designed for detection of fire by combination fixed temperature and rate-of-rise principle . The alarm condition shall be determined by comparing sensor valve with the stored values. Heat detector spacing shall be rated in accordance with UL 521. Detectors located in areas subject to moisture, exterior atmospheric conditions, or hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70 as indicated, shall be types approved for such locations.

2.9.2 Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors

Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Under fixed temperature actuation, the detector shall have a permanent external indication that is readily visible. Detector units located in boiler rooms, or other areas subject to abnormal temperature changes shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the Rate-of-Rise detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.

2.9.3 Fixed Temperature Detectors

Detectors shall be designed surface for outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be designed to detect high heat. The detectors shall have a specific temperature setting of 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.

2.9.4 Self-Test Routines



Automatic self-test routines shall be performed on each sensor that will functionally check sensor sensitivity electronics and ensure the accuracy of the value being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel.

2.9.5 Operator Access

An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each heat sensor:

a. Primary status

b. Device type

c. Present average value

d. Sensor range 5%

2.9.6 Operator Control

An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually control the following information for each heat sensor:

a. Alarm detection sensitivity values

b. Enable or disable the point/device

c. Control sensors relay driver output

2.10 ELECTRIC POWER 2.10.1 Primary Power

Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FACP from the AC service to the building in accordance with NFPA 72.

2.11 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY

Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm.

2.12.1 Batteries

Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium gel cell batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power.



2.12.2 Capacity

Battery size shall be the greater of the following two capacities.

a. Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 24 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes.

b. Sufficient capacity to operate the mass notification for 60 minutes after loss of AC power.

2.12.3 Battery Power Calculations

a. Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements.

(1) Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each panel component, and compliance with UL 864.

(2) Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert, and supervisory power

requirements. Submit ampere-hour requirements for each system component with the calculations.

(3) A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation

of the system and all components, at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries.

b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for

starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources.

2.12.4 Battery Chargers

Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 120 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided.

2.13 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the unit cabinets shall match exactly.



a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.

b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall

be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters.

c. Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, and initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file.

2.13.1 Cabinet

Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Fire Alarm Control Panel" and shall not be less than 1 inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.

2.13.2 Control Modules

Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and resistors, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltage at the sensor or appliance connected. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage

2.13.3 Silencing Switches 2.13.4 Alarm Silencing Switch

Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACP that shall silence the audible and visual. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.

2.13.5 Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch

Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm, supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.

2.13.6 Non-Interfering



Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.

2.13.7 Audible Notification System

The Audible Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for Emergency Alarm Communications System requirements ISO 7240-16, except as specified herein.

a. Other fire alarm functions including transmission of a signal(s) to the fire department shall remain

operational. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes.

2.13.8 Outputs and Operational Modules

All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Provide form "C" contacts for system alarm and trouble conditions. Provide circuits for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions.

2.13.9 Memory

Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.

2.13.10 Field Programmability

Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract.

2.13.11 Input/Output Modifications

The FACP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FACP.

2.13.12 Resetting

Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists.

2.13.13Instructions

Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame .Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the FACP. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a



signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Owner before being posted.

2.13.14 Walk Test

The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.

2.13.15 History Logging

In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory.

2.14 ANNUNCIATOR 2.14.1 Annunciator Panel

Provide an annunciator that includes an LCD display. The display shall indicate the device in trouble/alarm or any supervisory device. Display the device name, address, and actual building location.

A building floor plan shall be provided mounted (behind plexiglass or similar protective material) at the annunciator location. The floor plan shall indicate all rooms by name and number. The floor plan shall show all devices and their programmed address to facilitate their physical location from the LCD display information.

2.14.2 Programming

Where programming for the operation of the annunciator is accomplished by a separate software program than the software for the FACP, the software program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power. The software shall be reprogrammable in the field.

2.15 MANUAL STATIONS

Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station. Manual stations shall be mounted at 44 inches. Stations shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor.

2.16 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 2.16.2 Visual Notification Appliances



Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA). Fire Alarm Notification Appliances shall have clear high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and be marked "Fire” in red letters. The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of candela based on the UL 1971 test. Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor or field of view, provide synchronized operation. Devices shall use screw terminals for all field wiring.

2.17 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS

Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed. Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating device or notification appliance.

2.17.1 Signals to Be Transmitted to the NMSU Central Station

The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station: All Supervisory Signals

All Alarm Signals 2.18 WIRING

Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Division 26 with the additions and modifications specified herein. FA cabling may be plenum rated and installed without conduit concealed above ceilings and concealed in walls. In mechanical rooms and exposed locations use conduits as needed. Use wire mold in public areas

2.18.1 Alarm Wiring

The SLC wiring shall be solid copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be AWG size twisted and shielded solid conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm appliances, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltages for the sensors and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. Acceptable power-limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with red colored covering. Nonpower-limited cables shall comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCES 3.1.1 FACP



Locate the FACP where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP.

3.1.2 Manual Stations:

Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated on. Mount stations so that their operating handles are 44 above the finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.

3.1.3 Notification Appliance Devices

Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72. Ceiling mounted speakers shall conform to NFPA 72.

3.1.4 Smoke and Heat Sensors

Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and their listings on a 4 inch mounting box. Locate smoke and heat sensors on the ceiling. Install heat sensors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Heat sensors located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling, but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling. Smoke sensors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12 inches from the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply outlets.

3.1.5 Annunciator

Locate the annunciator as shown on the drawings. Flush mount the panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.

3.1.6 Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches

Connect to water flow detectors and tamper switches.

3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING 3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes

Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box shall be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts or similar devices is prohibited. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.

Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams.

a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical

field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show connections from field



devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.

b. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the

control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment.

3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets

Provide terminal cabinets where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches. Only screw-type terminals are permitted.

3.2.3 Alarm Wiring

Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. Conceal wiring in finished areas. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 10 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device or notification appliance circuits. Where used run conduit or tubing EMT, FMC, etc. as permitted by NFPA 72 and NFPA 70. Utilize shielded wiring where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, ground the shield at only one point, that is in or adjacent to the FACP. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. T-tapping using screw terminal blocks is allowed for Class "B" signaling line circuits. Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.

3.2.4 Conductor Terminations

Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FACP, and remote annunciator shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FACP, and remote ANNUNCIATYOR shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, in accordance with Division 7.

3.4 PAINTING

Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes red in unfinished areas and conduits and surface metal raceways shall be painted with a 1-inch wide red band every 10 feet in unfinished areas.. Painting shall comply with Division 9.



3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 Testing Procedures

Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, Guard's Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data; similar to the forma in NFPA 72) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and shall:

a. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits

(NAC), Voice Notification System Circuits (NAC Audio), and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test shall be performed.

c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity

within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity.

d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment

necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke).

e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

3.5.2 Tests Stages 3.5.2. Preliminary Testing

Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests." After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.

3.5.3 Request for Formal Inspection and Tests

When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the owner



3.5.4 Final Testing

Notify the Owner in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Owner. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the following are provided at the job site:

a. The systems manufacturer's technical representative b. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed c. Megger test results d. Loop resistance test results e. Complete program printout including input/output addresses

The final tests will be witnessed by the owner. At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion.

3.5.5 System Acceptance

Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals shall be delivered to the Owner for review and acceptance. Submit six sets of detailed as-built drawings. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test.

a. Furnish one set of full size paper as-built drawings and schematics. The drawings shall be

prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 24 by 36 inches with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to contract drawings. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD and DXF format of as-built drawings and schematics.

b. Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both

factory and field wired.

c. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment. 3.5.6 Minimum System Tests

Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16.The required tests are as follows:

a. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to panels or

devices, wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors



with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Owner and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

b. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of

conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Owner and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

c. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall

be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test. d. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M

manual. e. Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for proper operation and

response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 except that, for item 12(e) (Supervision) in Table 14.4.2.2, disconnect at least 20 percent of devices. If there is a failure at these devices, then supervision shall be tested at each device.

f. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and

specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual. g. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is

capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified. h. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified. i. Visually inspect wiring. j. Test the battery charger and batteries. k. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP.

Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Owner . l. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate. m. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits. n. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive. o. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of

smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke or the use of canned smoke which is permitted.

p. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each

notification appliance circuit. 3.6 INSTRUCTION OF DACC/NMSU EMPLOYEES



3.6.1 Instructor

Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the employees designated by the Owner, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. Submit the instructors information and qualifications including the training history.

3.6.2 Required Instruction Time

Provide 16 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. Broken into 4 unique 4 hour training sessions. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the owner. The instruction may be divided into more periods at the discretion of the owner. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.

3.6.3 Technical Training

Equipment manufacturer or a factory representative shall provide 3 days of onsite training for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises.

3.7 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE

Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system.

3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS

Submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals shall be approved prior to training. The Interior Fire Alarm System Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

a. "Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Division 1.

b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and

shutdown. The manual shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.

c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs,

and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed.

d. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both

equipment and software requirements.



e. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.

f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.

g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a

columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing frequencies, etc.) shall comply with NFPA 72.

3.9 EXTRA MATERIALS 3.9.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts

Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Owner. During guarantee period, the service technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.

3.9.2 Interchangeable Parts

Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner at the time of the final acceptance testing.

3.9.3 Spare Parts

Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:

a. Four fuses for each fused circuit

b Four of each type of notification appliance in the system (e.g. speaker, FA strobe, MNS strobe, etc.)

c. Eight of each type of initiating device included in the system (e.g. smoke detector, thermal

detector, manual station, etc.) Only 2 extra duct detectors are required. 3.9.4 Special Tools

Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

DACC Main Campus

Building 341 Renovation

RBM Engineering, Inc. Robert H. Beasley, P.E. Project Engineer 15024

INDEX

Section 21 1000 Fire Protection System Section 22 0500 Basic Mechanical Requirements Section 22 0516 Piping Expansion Compensation Section 22 0519 Gages and Meters Section 22 0529 Supports and Anchors Section 22 0553 Mechanical Identification Section 22 0700 Piping Insulation Section 22 1000 Plumbing Piping Section 22 1010 Plumbing Specialties Section 22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures Section 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Section 23 0700 Ductwork Insulation Section 23 0900 Automatic Temperature Control/Facilities Management System Section 23 3113 Ductwork Section 23 3300 Ductwork Accessories Section 23 3423 Exhaust Fans Section 23 3616 Variable Air Volume Terminal Units Section 23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets Section 23 7200 Energy Recovery Ventilators Section 23 7400 Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units


FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1000 - 1

SECTION 21 1000 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Related Documents: Drawings, Notice to Bidders, General Conditions, Project Coordination, RFP Format, Requested RFP Alternatives, Cutting and Patching, Standard Terms and Conditions, and all Appendices apply to the work of this section.

B. Coordinate work with other trades working on the project. Refer to mechanical drawings for plenum space allocation showing elevations of the above ceiling spaces for coordination purposes. Automatic sprinkler systems to be monitored by the building fire detection and alarm system. Refer to Section – ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Section Includes

1 Automatic sprinkler system. 2 Fire department connections.

B. Provide all materials, labor, tools, equipment, transportation services and supervision for

the design and installation of revisions and adjustments to the existing automatic sprinkler system, and standpipe system where required by the current state adopted International Building Code in accordance with the applicable codes and all requirements of this specification.

C. All work shall be subject to the terms and conditions contained within the contract documents.

D. All work shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications. No modifications to these Specifications will be accepted without the expressed written approval of the State of New Mexico, and New Mexico State University. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to document Authority’s approval of any such modifications prior to the execution of work. All modifications and substitutions shall be separately submitted for review by the Engineer of Record and Authority.

E. System concept drawings are for information only to show potential system arrangement.

Contractor shall field verify all information contained on these drawings and is responsible for layout and installation of the system in accordance with the Specifications. The bid drawings do not show all information necessary for the installation of the system, but are intended to be used as a guide by the Contractor for the purpose of designing the system and preparing his bid. Contractor’s detailed installation drawings of the complete fire protection sprinkler and standpipe system shall be submitted to the State of New Mexico and New Mexico State University Fire Marshal’s office , any local agencies, and the Engineer of Record for approval.



F. Prepare and submit shop drawings, record drawings and other submittals required herein.

G. Test each new sprinkler and standpipe system. The sprinkler contractor shall also attend all fire detection and alarm system tests to aid in testing sprinkler system monitoring devices. The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out required tests. Separate tests may be required by the Engineer of Record, Fire Marshal’s Office, or local agencies.

H. Guarantee all new equipment and systems during installation and for a one year period after final acceptance of the work by the Fire Marshal or local agencies.

I. Obtain all approvals required for the work of this section from the Authority, Fire Marshal, local agencies, from the project insurer, and from the Engineer of Record.

J. Pay all fees required to obtain permits or approval of this work.

K. The system equipment installed are more specifically described as:

1. A complete fire sprinkler system for the renovation of DACC Main Campus Building 341.

2. System shall include a new fire sprinkler distribution piping, sprinkler heads and all test and drain points as required by NFPA 13.

L. Contractor to provide training to the building maintenance personnel.

1 The Contractor shall conduct two (2) training sessions of four (4) hours each to familiarize the building personnel with the features, operation and maintenance of the sprinkler and standpipe systems. Training sessions shall be scheduled by the owner at a time mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Authority and the owner.

2. The Contractor shall submit a proposed training agenda for review and approval by the Engineer of Record within 60 days of authorization to proceed. The proposed training agenda shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Overview of system operation. b. Overview of system equipment and device locations. c. Detailed operation guidelines. d. Detailed maintenance procedures. e. Periodic testing procedures.

3. The Contractor shall submit the final approved training agenda 14 days prior to the first training session.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. International Building Code, with New Mexico State Code amendments (New Mexico Commercial Building Code).

B. Level” of alternations or renovations

C. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association, Battery March Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269, U.S.A. Please note that the State Fire Marshals Office currently applies 1999 version of NFPA code.



1 No. 13,– Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2 No. 24, – Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their

Appurtenances 3 No. 25, – Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water Based

Fire Protection Systems 4 No. 70, – National Electrical Code 5 No. 72, – National Fire Alarm Code 6 No. 101, – Life Safety Code

D. ANSI: American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, New York, 10018, U.S.A.

1 A21.4 Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water 2 A21.10 Ductile and Grey Iron Fittings, 3 Through 48 Inch for Water and Other

Liquids 3 A21.51 Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand Lined

Molds for Water and Other Liquids 4 A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 5 B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300 6 B16.4 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250 7 B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings 8 B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 9 B16.15 Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250 10 B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 11 B16.25 Butt Welding Ends for Pipe, Valves, Flanges, and Fittings 12 B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fitting

E. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,

Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103, U.S.A.

1 A-53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless 2 A-135 Electric-resistance – Welded Steel Pipe 3 A-795 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless for

Fire Protection Use 4 B-75 Specification for Seamless Copper Tube 5 B-88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube 6 B251 Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper – Alloy Tube

F. AWWA: American Water Works Association, 6666 West Quincy Ave., Denver, Colorado 80235 USA.

1 M14 Recommended Practice for Backflow Prevention and Cross-Connection Central.

2 C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. through 12 in. for water and other liquids.

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) requirements applicable to product listing.

H. Factory Mutual Systems Approval Guide.




A. Contractor shall verify existing conditions and all work required to install a complete new fire sprinkler system to meet the system demands for the project.

B. Provide, install and properly adjust sprinkler system supervisory switches and waterflow indicators as required herein.

C. Provide system drains as necessary to drain and test the sprinkler and standpipe systems. Drains to be designed to discharge directly to the outside.

D. Install shields necessary to protect electrical equipment from sprinkler discharge.

E. Coordinate work with other trades working on the project.

F. Provide all control valves, and other appurtenance as required for a fully operable system by the Authority, Fire Marshal and local agencies, and the contract documents.


A. Sprinkler system equipment and installation to be in accordance with recommendations of and approved by Authority’s insurance underwriters, Fire Marshal’s Office, and any local agencies.

B. All work and materials shall conform to all Federal, State, and local codes and regulations governing this installation. All work shall meet the requirements of the applicable codes, Authority, Fire Marshal, local agencies, and Engineer of Record.

C. With exceptions as specified and/or indicated on the drawings or in the

specifications, apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean and condition manufactured articles, materials and equipment per manufacturer’s current printed information. Keep copies of such printed recommendations and NFPA pamphlets at job site and make them available to the Engineer of Record and Authority.

D. Refer to the mechanical and electrical drawings for above ceiling coordination. The

location of the sprinklers and sprinkler piping shall be established after the plumbing, electrical and HVAC trades have established the location of their system components. The sprinklers and sprinkler system piping shall be coordinated around the other trades listed above. Submittals shall indicate that the coordination has taken place. If during or after the installation of the sprinkler system, it is found that the coordination with other trades was not done by the sprinkler contractor, the sprinkler contractor shall rework the sprinkler system, in order to achieve the necessary coordinated installation, while still meeting the design requirements listed within this specification at no additional cost to the Authority.

E. If there is a conflict between the referenced NFPA Standards, Federal, State or local codes and this specification, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to bring the conflict to the attention of the Authority and Engineer of Record for resolution.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for filing all documents, paying all fees and securing all permits, inspections and approvals necessary for conducting this work.

G. Welding materials and labor shall conform to ASME code and applicable state labor regulations. Before proceeding, submit for approval proposed procedures conforming



to ANSI B31.1: Code for Pressure Piping, Chapter V, and ANSI Z49.1: Safety in Welding & Cutting. Use welders fully qualified and licensed by state authorities.

H. All devices, systems, equipment and materials furnished and installed shall be new and shall be of types or models approved by the Authority and Engineer of Record for use in systems and occupancies of this type.


A. All work shall meet the requirements of Section 1.3.

B. No approvals or interpretations of the design documents shall be pursued except through the Engineer of Record by written submission.

C. Contractor shall hold all licenses and obtain all permits necessary to perform work of this type in the State of New Mexico. Copies of the Contractor’s licenses shall be provided with bid submittal.

D. Contractor shall have at least five (5) years of experience in installation of system of this type and be familiar with all applicable local, state and Federal laws and regulations.

E. Contractor shall be regularly engaged in installation, testing and servicing of automatic sprinkler and standpipe systems.

F. Contractor shall provide a job supervisor who is to be present at all times when work is actively in progress.

G. Contractor’s shop drawings reflecting the design shall be stamped and sealed by a

Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of New Mexico. Shop drawings shall be prepared at a minimum by a NICET Level lll technician in automatic sprinkler and standpipe design. The Contractor shall obtain and submit copies of all licenses and certificates with the bid submittal.

H. Any work performed prior to the satisfactory review of the shop drawings by the

Engineer of Record and determined to be non-compliance with the contract documents or applicable codes by the Authority’s Representative or Engineer of Record will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

I. Contractor shall submit all records of final testing to the Fire Marshal and Authority. The system will not be acceptable until final testing is complete and until receipt and approval of the Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate is received from the Fire Marshal.

J. The Contractor hereby acknowledges that all dollar amounts quoted in contract documents, correspondence, unit process, alternate proposals and any other prices provided by the Contractor or requested by the Owner’s representatives include all sales, use, value-added, excise or other taxes currently in place or enacted in the course of the project. No additional amounts of compensation are to be charged to the Owner for taxes applicable to this project.

1.7 SUBMITTALS



A. Prior to the commencement of work, the fire protection contractor shall submit to the Authority:

1 One (1) copy of the transmittal of the permit application to the Applicable local agency.

2 One (1) copy of the authorization that the installing contractor is a duly qualified representative of the fire protection equipment manufacturer.

3 One (1) copy of the installing contractor’s Certificate of Fitness from the Fire Marshal.

B. Prior to application for the initial payment for any work performed on the fire protection

systems, the following submittals shall be received and approved by the Authority and the owner’s Representative:

1. Reproducible sets of installation drawings. Submittal must be comprehensive of the entire project, complete in all detail, and include, but not be limited to, the following: a. All information and sheets required by the Fire Marshal’s published

“Fire Protection System Submittal Guidelines”. b. Floor plans showing the location of all equipment, controls, piping,

valves and drains. Drawings shall also show hangers and other supports including sway bracing and flexible couplings installed as flexure joints, and location and diameter of all necessary core drills, pipe sleeves and pipe clearance openings in walls and floors. Floor plans shall be provided in AUTOCAD Release 14 or later version and also in PDF format.

c. Include list of all material to be used for the systems. The manufacturer, trade name and catalog number shall be given for each item. Information shall include type of pipe, hangers, valves, pipe fittings/joining methods, sprinklers, water flow devices, supervisory devices, fire department connections, escutcheons, and signage.

d. Riser diagram of system. e. Include hydraulic calculations to show most hydraulically remote area

and verify adequate water supply. f. For systems that include a fire pump, drawings shall show power supply

connections and/or fuel system provisions for the fire pump, pressure maintenance pump, and controllers.

g. For systems that include dedicated water tank, drawings shall show details of water tank and interconnection to the system.

2. One (1) copy of a schedule of values to be the basis for all progress payment

requests by the Contractor.

C. Prior to the request for an inspection for a Fire Marshal Inspection, the fire protection system contractor shall submit and have documentation of receipt by the Authority and Fire Marshal for the following submittals:

1 One (1) copy each of all installation manuals in hard copy and electronic media. 2 One (1) original of the Fire Marshal’s “Fire Protection Pre-inspection Checklist”

in hard copy and electronic media. 3 One (1) sample copy of the documentation format for recording the fire



protection system acceptance test. Test document format shall, as a minimum, comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 25 including the “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate”.

4 Half scale (11 inches by 17 inches) contractor record drawings of the system showing all equipment, controls, piping, valves, drains, and supports.

D. Engineer of Record shall review for accuracy all submittals required to be received prior

to equipment release or installation. The Authority or the Authority’s Representative shall not be responsible for any additional costs resulting from placement of equipment or materials not reviewed prior to installation.

E. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the sprinkler system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings approved by the Engineer of Record or Authority without written instruction from the Engineer of Record or Authority in each case. This set of drawings shall be used only as a record set.


A. Prior to application for final payment:, the fire protection system contractor shall submit the following to the Authority and the owner’s Representative:

1 Copies of all reports for tests and inspections as required by the Authority, Fire Marshal and local agencies.

2 Copies of all permits and licenses required. 3 Record drawings of the complete installation to include, but not be limited to

information required on the installation drawing submittal. All information shall accurately show the completed installation. Record drawings of the floor plans shall be provided in AUTOCAD latest version and also in PDF format. Provide drawings in hard copy and electronic media.

4 Original warranty documents including, but not limited to, those of the fire protection equipment manufacturer and installing contractor(s). Warranty documents shall reference and be binding to the warranty provisions specified.

5 Copies of all site hydraulic calculations. Hydraulic calculations shall show a 10 psi safety factor.

6 Service directory which includes the main 24-hour emergency service number and at least three alternate numbers which are monitored on a 24-hour basis.

7 Three (3) sets of equipment warranties and three (3) sets of operations and maintenance manuals to the Authority.

B. Specifications shall require that the Engineer of Record receive, in writing from the

contractor, any comments from the local agencies within five (5) working days after the receipt of their comments. Engineer of Record will determine the appropriate actions for response to the comments.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Authority with a loose-leaf Operation and Maintenance manual containing:

1 11" x 17" reduced copies of the record drawings required below. 2 Copy of NFPA 13 (Applicable edition) and NFPA 14 (Applicable edition)



3 Copy of all test certificates and approvals. 4 A list of recommended spare parts. 5 Service directory.

D. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of

approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the sprinkler system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings approved by the Engineer of Record or Authority without written instruction from the Engineer of Record or Authority in each case. This set of drawings shall be used only as a record set.

E. Upon review of the record drawings, before final approval, one set of reproducible record drawings and additional copies of record drawings shall be delivered to the Engineer of Record.

1.9 SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Hydraulic calculations shall be based on NFPA 13. Version as adopted or applied by New Mexico State University Fire Marshal’s Office and the SFMO.

B. Densities: Hydraulically calculated wet-pipe sprinkler systems shall be designed and installed to meet the following discharge density requirements for areas indicated to be sprinkled:

1 Light Hazard – 0.10 gpm/square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet area. Examples of light hazard include classrooms, office areas, dorm rooms, multipurpose, lounge and similar spaces.

2 Ordinary Hazard Group I Occupancies – 0.15 gpm/square foot over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet. Examples of ordinary hazard group I include mechanical and electrical rooms.

3 Ordinary Hazard Group II Occupancies – 0.20 gpm/square foot over hydraulically most remote 1,500 square feet. Examples of ordinary hazard group II include storage rooms with storage greater than 8 feet in height and maintenance shops with larger quantities of flammable and combustible liquids.

4 Areas with large quantities of flammable and combustible liquids shall comply with NFPA 30.

C. Special Areas of Application shall be modified as follows:

1 Wet pipe sprinkler systems installed under sloped ceilings with a pitch exceeding 2 inches in 12 inches shall have an area increased of 30% if Standard Spray sprinklers are used.

2 Wet pipe sprinkler systems using Quick Response sprinklers throughout may reduce the area of application in accordance with and subject to the conditions of NFPA 13.

3 Dry pipe systems shall have an area increase of 30%. 4 Where combustible concealed spacers exist, the design area shall be 3,000 square

feet. 5 Provide sprinklers under ducts as required by NFPA 13. These are not shown on

the drawings. The base bid price shall include up to 20 sprinklers under ducts. A unit additional price for sprinklers under ducts in excess of 20 shall be specified



by the Contractor in the Bid Format sheets. 6 All skylights shall be protected regardless of spacing, size or depth.

D. The calculations shall include the required minimum inside hose stream at the hose valve closest to the floor control assembly for the associated design area. Combined inside and outside hose stream allowance shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. A minimum of 10 psi safety factor shall be maintained for all hydraulic calculations.

E. The contractor shall conduct their own water supply verification flow tests to determine available flow and pressures for use in the design of the fire sprinkler system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All equipment and system components furnished and installed shall be new and of first quality, and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or approved by Factory Mutual (FM) for their intended use. All such equipment and system components shall be installed within the limitations of the respective UL listings or FM approvals.

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

Sprinkler system piping or tubing shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13. Contractor shall base his bid on the use of any one or a combination of the following:

A. Underground piping: Provide and install as required by AWWA.

B. Aboveground: a. Only utilize piping that has been UL listed for fire protection use. b. Install in accordance with UL listing. Prohibited to be installed in combustible

concealed spaces and must be protected by construction elements.

C. Underground piping: All underground pipe shall be centrifugally cast ductile iron. At the building to a point 5 feet beyond the edge of the building. Beyond this point refer to specifications previously noted.

D. Underground pipe fittings: Underground pipe fittings shall be "Tyton", "Fastite", or "Belltite" mechanical joint, short body Class 230 Fittings conforming to ANSI Specification A21.10. Flanged Fittings shall conform to ANSI Specification 3161, Class 125.

E. Pressure ratings: Pressure ratings of all fittings shall meet or exceed maximum working pressures available within the system.

F. Corrosion protection: All piping and hangers where exposed to the weather or installed in a corrosive atmosphere shall be protected against corrosion.

2.2.1 BURIED PIPING

A. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900, class 150.

1. AWWA C110.



2. AST< D3139. Bell and spigot with rubber gaskets. 3. Valves and fitting joints: Mechanical, AWWA C111.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.

1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket,

steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 2.2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; ASTM A135 UL listed, rolled grooved end, schedule 10 for mains down to 2 ½ inch; ASTM A795; Schedule 40 black, threaded, 2 inch and less. All pipe for exposed areas shall be schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Use galvanized pipe, grooved and threaded for sizes defined above for all dry systems.

1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ASME B16.25,

buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded.

2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.4, threaded fittings.

3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and

lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.

5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe.

2.3 CONTROL AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Types: Sprinkler system control and drain valves shall be the following types:

1 O.S.&Y. gate valves. 2 Butterfly valves that are approved for use in sprinkler systems. 3 Butterfly valves with integral valve supervisory switches, whose entire assembly

is approved for use in sprinkler systems.

B. Listing: All valves must be UL listed or FM approved for their intended use.

C. Signs: All water supply control valves and drain valves shall be permanently marked with metal signs to show their function and sprinkler system zone which they serve.

D. Pressure Ratings: Pressure ratings of all valves shall meet or exceed maximum working pressures available within the system.

E. Supervision: All control valves shall be locked and electrically supervised.

F. Locks: All valves shall be provided with a break-away shackle lock (and chain if required). All locks shall be keyed the same. Provide Authority with a minimum of 2



keys on ring appropriately marked.

G. Access Panels: Provide and install access panels (minimum size 12-inches by 12-inches) for all control valves located above finished ceilings or concealed in walls. Architect will select finish of access panels. Access panels installed in fire resistive construction shall be of the types required for maintaining proper protection of assembly.

2.4 SPRINKLERS

A. Automatic sprinklers shall be of the following types:

1 Sprinklers shall be concealed type in all areas with finished ceilings. Architect and Authority to select and approve sprinklers.

2 Use concealed quick response type heads in all dorm rooms. 3 Standard upright or pendent sprinklers shall be installed in unfinished areas. 4 Install dry type sprinklers or dry systems in areas where temperatures are not

maintained above 40 degrees. 5 Install intermediate temperature sprinklers near glazing and where temperatures

can exceed 100 degrees. 6 Sprinklers installed exposed and less than 9-feet above the finished floor shall be

provided with listed wire guards.

B. The Architect will select finishes for all automatic sprinklers and escutcheons from samples of available finishes supplied by Contractor.

C. All sprinklers within a space shall be from the same manufacturer and have the same heat response element, including temperature rating and response characteristics.

D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to install sprinklers of the proper temperature rating as required by NFPA 13.

E. Sprinklers located on exterior piping systems, or located in corrosive atmospheres shall be corrosion resistant.

F. Escutcheons shall be metal and be listed with the sprinklers for recessed sprinkler locations.

G. All sprinklers shall be standard orifice sprinklers (1/2" orifice) unless specifically approved otherwise.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Contractor shall furnish and install hydraulic calculation signs for each new sprinkler zone. Contractor shall also provide identification signs for all valves installed under this section.

B. Required Information: Hydraulic calculation signs shall include all information indicated in NFPA 13. Valve identification signs shall identify the function of the valve and the area served.

C. Description: Signs shall be rigid, flat steel or aluminum plaques with embossed enamel



background and lettering. Signs shall be secured by chain or durable wire to each sprinkler zone control valve, or in an obvious location specifically approved by the Architect.

2.6 SUPERVISORY AND ALARM EQUIPMENT

A. All waterflow and valve supervisory switches shall be furnished, installed and properly adjusted by the sprinkler contractor. Alarm monitoring of these devices will be by others.

B. All waterflow and valve supervisory switches shall be provided with two "Form C" (D.P.D.T.) contacts for monitoring. Specific contact rating shall be coordinated with the fire alarm contractor.

C. Vane-type waterflow indicators shall be provided to indicate waterflow in each new sprinkler system zone.

D. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided for all valves controlling the water supply to the sprinkler and standpipe systems.

E. Valve supervisory switches shall be the yoke mounted or integral type. Contractor shall not use remote mounted, wire loop type switches.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Pressure Gauges: Pressure gauges shall be UL listed 4 1/2-inch minimum dial type gauges with a maximum limit of not less than twice the normal working pressure at the point installed. All gauges shall be provided with a shut-off valve (gauge-cock).

2.8 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

Spare parts and special tools shall be provided to the Architect prior to final acceptance.

A. Spare Parts: The Contractor shall install two (2) metal sprinkler cabinets containing a minimum total of four (4) sprinklers, of each type, finish and temperature rating used, but not less than 24 spare sprinklers. Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of sprinkler wrenches compatible with each type of sprinkler provided. The cabinets shall be installed at the locations approved by the Architect.

B. Special Tools: The Contractor shall supply the Architect with two (2) complete sets of special tools and equipment necessary to perform routine maintenance on the sprinkler systems.

2.9 WARRANTY AND EMERGENCY SERVICE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one year beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Fire Marshal or other AHJ designated by the Authority. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and guarantee periods for any damage caused by him (or his subcontractors) or by defects in his (or his subcontractors') work, materials, or equipment.

B. Emergency Service: During the installation and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within eight (8) hours of a



request by the Architect or Authority for such service. This service shall be provided on a 24-hour per day, seven days per week basis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Coordinate closely with all other trades to expedite construction, accurately interface with related systems and avoid interferences.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for attending weekly construction coordination meetings with the Engineer of Record and Authority.

C. The sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate with the work of the other trades towards the general purpose of having the construction progress as rapidly and as smoothly as possible with a minimum of interference between trades.

D. Before the start of Structural Work, the sprinkler Contractor shall submit instructions for openings and penetrations required for his work to the Architect. Instructions shall be subject to the Authority’s approval. The sprinkler Contractor shall provide any subsequent additional penetrations or openings or relocation required, but not delineated in his instructions at no additional cost to the Authority.

3.2 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION

A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to inspect the drawings and become familiar with the conditions under which the work will be performed.

B. All work may be conducted during normal working hours.

C. No work shall commence prior to approval of shop drawings by the Authority. Any change in work which has been installed prior to approval of the shop drawings shall be made without additional compensation to the Contractor.

D. Aesthetics shall be a primary consideration when installing sprinklers and sprinkler piping. Any facet of sprinkler installation that does not meet with the Authority's approval shall be revised by the Contractor to the Authority's satisfaction.

E. All holes made by the Contractor in any wall, ceiling, or floor shall be patched by the Contractor, restoring the wall, ceiling, floor or member to its original condition, fire resistance and integrity.

F. Location of all equipment, controls, piping, valves and drains shall be subject to Architect's approval.

G. All sprinklers and equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All special tools recommended by the manufacturer shall be used.

H. Sprinklers permanently installed shall be installed with the deflector to ceiling distances in accordance with NFPA 13.

3.3 PIPING



A. All sprinkler piping installed in areas with finished or suspended ceilings shall be concealed in the walls, ceilings or soffits. Pipe in unfinished areas may be exposed.

B. All piping exposed within the building areas shall be painted by the Contractor. All

exterior piping shall be primed with zinc chromate and painted by the Contractor. Architect to select paint colors.

C. All exposed pipe which passes through a wall, ceiling, or floor shall be provided

with escutcheon plates.

D. All exposed piping and devices shall be installed as high as possible, but no less than 7-feet 0-inches above the finished floor in traffic or working areas, and so as not to obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway or passageway, and shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of any mechanical, plumbing or electrical equipment.

E. Valves controlling water supply to the sprinkler systems shall be less than 7-feet 0-inches above the finished floor when specifically approved by the Architect, they may be higher if they are provided with operating chains.

F. The Contractor shall provide Architect approved, adequate permanent protection for any installed piping, valves, devices or accessories which, in the Architect's opinion, are subject to physical damage or may be hazards.

G. Pipe which passes through fire-resistive barriers (including shaft walls) shall be sleeved and grouted or sealed to maintain the integrity and rating of the fire resistive barrier.

H. Underground piping shall be installed as required in applicable sections of this specification. Trenching, pipe laying, backfill, compaction, thrust blocks, testing and flushing shall be in accordance with the specifications.

3.4 CUTTING, PATCHING AND FINISHES

A. All piping and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned, removing all dirt, oil, etc.

B. All exposed piping and valves shall be made ready to receive paint.

1 All piping exposed in mechanical rooms, or exposed in attics or other unfinished areas shall be painted red with an enamel designed for covering metal or the other raceway material.

2 All piping exposed in finished areas shall be painted to match the adjacent existing finish or finished as more specifically described below:

C. Employ a skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching new

Work; restore Work with new Products.

D. Submit written request to Authority in advance of cutting or altering structural or building enclosure elements.

E. Holes in walls or floors cut during the performance of this work and all holes or cuts revealed by the removal of existing fire alarm system devices, equipment or circuits shall be patched or covered with standard escutcheon plates so as to completely conceal



the cuts where they would otherwise be exposed to view.

F. Patched surfaces shall be prepared to accept final finishes that match the finish of the existing adjacent surfaces so as to completely conceal patched holes. Final finishes shall be provided by others.

G. Fire stop all penetrations of fire rated assemblies with listed fire-stopping systems. 3.5 SYSTEM TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS

A. The sprinkler subcontractor shall provide all test valves and drain connections as required by NFPA 13.

B. All test connections and drain connections shall be hard piped to discharge waste water directly into a floor drain. The sprinkler contractor shall route the pipe and modify any floor drain grates as necessary to minimize splashing due to discharge. In locations where the Architect allows, the drain may discharge with a down turned elbow at the building exterior. In these locations the contractor shall provide a concrete splash block to protect the landscaping.

3.6 RISERS

A. The Contractor shall locate the main risers and standpipes for the sprinkler system in order to minimize obstruction to traffic or building operations. Exact location of risers shall be approved by the Architect.

B. The fire sprinkler system shall be zoned on a per floor basis and divided into zones as noted in the zone diagram. Zones shall match fire detection and alarm system zones.

C. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided on all valves controlling water supply to the fire sprinkler system, including valves located at backflow preventers.

3.7 FLUSHING AND SANITIZATION

A. Prior to connecting the sprinkler piping with the underground main, the Contractor shall flush and sanitize the underground main in accordance with NFPA 13 and the Health Department and the water company's standards. The Contractor shall notify the fire department prior to underground flushing.

3.8 SWAY BRACING, FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS, HANGERS

A. All flexible couplings, hangers and sway bracing shall be designed and installed as required by NFPA 13 (including all appendices). Flexibility, internal pressure, and differential movement between the piping and building, earth, or other supporting structure(s) shall be allowed for, so that no allowable stress is exceeded in any member.

3.9 FINAL INSPECTION AND TEST

A. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Engineer of Record and Authority for final inspection and witnessing of the final acceptance tests.

B. Prior to testing by the Fire Marshal, the Contractor’s checklist shall be submitted with the request for acceptance inspection and testing.



C. All tests and inspections required by the referenced Codes and Standards, Fire Marshal, local agencies, and the Engineer of Record shall be performed by the Contractor under this scope of work.

1 When local code authorities are required to witness tests, the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the code authorities and coordinating the work with the Engineer of Record.

2 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all test documents with necessary approval stamps and signatures of the code authorities. The Contractor shall submit one copy of each of these documents to the Engineer of Record.

D. Contractor shall provide at least five (5) working days notice for all tests.

E. Final approval and acceptance of the work will be given by the Engineer of Record and Authority when:

1 The completed sprinkler systems have been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer of Record and the Fire Marshal.

2 Required submittals, system operation and maintenance manuals, record drawings, spare parts, special tools and training have been provided to, reviewed, and accepted by the Authority and Engineer of Record.

3.10 RECEIVING AND HANDLING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all receiving, handling and storage of his materials at the job site. Use of loading docks, service driveways, and freight elevators shall be coordinated with the Authority and the owner.

3.11 RUBBISH REMOVAL

A. Contractor shall remove rubbish and debris resulting from his work on a daily basis from the work site. Rubbish not removed by the Contractor may be removed by the Architect and back charged to the Contractor.



BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 0500 - 1

SECTION 22 0500 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.2

A. Work covered by this Division shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of mechanical systems as required by these specifications and/or shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the alteration of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful installation of all systems described on the drawings or required by these specifications.

B. Prior Approvals: 1. Prior Approvals – Most major equipment will require a complete dimensional and

performance submittal for manufacturer’s other than those listed as approved. See applicable specification sections for these requirements.

1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 22 and 23 work. Note

that the Division 22 and 23 Contractor will also be subject to the Basic Requirements and General Conditions outlined in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. INDEX – (BREAKDOWN OF SECTIONS) PART 1. GENERAL Scope of Work Section Includes Index Related Documents General Qualifications and Guidelines Permits, Utility Connections and Inspections Qualifications Qualification Procedures Guarantee – Warranty Contract Documents Work Sequence Submittals and Shop Drawings Substitutions

Products, Materials and Workmanship Regulatory Requirements General Materials and Equipment Requirements Wall, Floor and Ceiling Plates Sleeves, Inserts and Fastenings Electrical Arrangement of Motors and Equipment Project Site Conditions Cooperation Between Trades and with Other Contractors

Supervision Site Observation Records for Owner Existing Facilities Demolition and Relocation Altitude Ratings Roof/Equipment Interface



Fire and Smoke Rating Requirements PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used. PART 3 – EXECUTION Pipe Pressure Tests Concrete Bases And Housekeeping Pads Alignment Of Flexible Couplings Manufacturer’s Recommendations Space and Equipment Arrangement Protection Installing Methods Cutting And Patching Excavation, Trenching And Backfill Access Doors Operation Prior To Completion Cooperation And Clean Up Clean And Painting Tests Log Of Tests Start-Up And Training Operation And Maintenance Data

1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Related Sections – Coordinate the requirements of this specification with requirements in

other sections. See other sections including: 1. Specification Sections for Cutting and Patching. 2. Specification Sections for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 3. Specification Sections for Storage and Protection. 4. Specification Sections for Product Options and Substitutions. 5. Specification Sections for Project Record Documents. 6. Specification Sections for Utilities Excavating and Backfilling. 7. Specification Sections for Concrete. 8. Specification Sections for Rough Carpentry. 9. Specification Sections for Flashing and Sheet Metal. 10. Specification Sections for Painting. 11. Specification Sections for Electrical.

B. All work covered by this Section shall be accomplished in accordance with all applicable provisions of the Contract Documents and any addenda or directives which may be issued herewith, or otherwise.

C. All work covered by this section shall be accomplished in accordance with all applicable codes. The Contractor will be expected to be familiar with the codes in addition to practices and workmanship standard to the industry.

1.5 GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS AND GUIDELINES A. The Contractor shall be skilled in his trade. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter

specified or indicated on accompanying Drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems whether or not mentioned specifically herein or on the Drawings. Contractor’s requirements should be considered performance based in addition to the prescriptive requirements of these specifications. It is the general intent that a complete and fully operational system be provided. The Contractor’s bid for the work shall carry the intent that all systems are furnished complete and operational unless specifically indicated otherwise.



B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting the material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide a neat, integrated, satisfactory, complete and operating installation.

C. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of code, industry standard practice and workmanship, structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work.

D. When the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas with access provided where required for proper operation of the system. See the section titled “Contract Documents” for further information on this topic.

E. Existing Utilities – 1. The drawings indicate the locations, type and sizes of various utilities

and conditions within the site where known. These utilities and conditions are indicated as accurately as possible. If the Contractor encounters any utilities during construction, which are not shown on the drawings, they shall ask for written instructions from the Engineer. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by a change order. This Contractor shall assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and for repair required by this construction.

2. Contractor shall verify location, size, elevation, pressure and any other pertinent data of the existing utilities and conditions. Additional costs incurred due to failure to verify such data and to coordinate associated work with respective utility providers shall not be the Owner’s responsibility but shall be borne by the Contractor.

3. All costs associated with providing utilities and conditions including, but not limited to, inspection fees, abatement fees, permitting fees, boring under roads, etc., shall be included in the Contractor’s bid price whether such costs are incurred by contractor or charged by the utility company.

4. Submission of a bid by the Contractor shall be considered an acknowledgment by the Contractor of his compliance with this section.

5. The Contractor shall coordinate with Owner’s Facility Management, Architect, and this Engineer’s office any work that has the potential to hinder mechanical and plumbing services to areas inside or outside this Contract. All shut downs or tie-ins relating to these systems shall be scheduled and submitted in writing to be approved by the Owner’s Facility Management, Architect, and this Engineer’s office. Contractor shall submit in writing a schedule of construction phasing that indicates areas of first priority during each phase and anticipated completion times. Schedules shall be submitted a minimum of seven days before commencing work. Owner’s Facility Management, Architect, and this Engineer’s office shall review these schedules and notify the Contractor of acceptance prior to commencement of work.

F. Insurance – 1. The Contractor shall have required insurance. Required insurance shall be provided by this Contractor for protection against public liability and property damage for the duration of work. 2. The Contractor shall provide insurance as required in the architectural section of the specifications.



G. Conflicts and Correction – 1. Promptly correct work rejected or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract, whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear cost of correcting such rejected and nonconforming work including additional testing and inspections and including

compensation for observing mechanical and electrical engineering firm’s services and expenses made necessary thereby.

2. If a conflict occurs on the bid documents, the Contractor shall contact the Architect’s and

Engineer’s offices with a written request for clarification. If the conflict is un-resolvable at the time of bid, the most expensive interpretation of the conflict shall be bid so the conflict can be resolved in a deductive manner at a later time if necessary.

3. If a conflict is discovered during construction, the Contractor shall stop work on that portion of the project and contact the appropriate party for clarification. The request for clarification shall be in written form. The Contractor shall bare the burden of replacing work that has been incorrectly demolished/removed as a result of a conflict on the drawings where he has not sought the Architect’s and Engineer’s guidance for clarification.

H. DEFINITIONS (Note: These definitions are included here to clarify the direction and intention of this specification. The list given here is not by any means complete. For further clarification as required, Contractor shall contact the designated Owner’s representative.) 1. Concealed/Exposed – Concealed areas are those areas, which cannot be seen by the building occupants. Exposed areas are all areas, which are exposed to view by the

building occupants, including under counters, inside cabinets and closets, plus all mechanical rooms. All systems, whether concealed or exposed shall be provided with access as required for proper operation of the system.

2. General Requirements – Provisions of requirements in Division 1 as well as other sections, which apply, to the entire work of the Contract and/or project. Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions.

3. Indicated – The term “indicated” is a cross reference to graphic representations, notes or schedules on drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to

similar means of recording requirements on Contract documents. Where terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used in lieu of “indicated”, it is for the purpose of helping reader locate the cross reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

4. Directed, requested, etc. – Where not otherwise explained, terms such as “directed”, “requested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “approved”, “required”, “accepted, and

“permitted” mean directed by Engineer/Architect, “requested by Engineer/Architect” and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Engineer’s/Architect’s responsibility into Contractor’s area of construction supervision and job safety.

5. And/Or – Where “and/or” is used in these Specifications or on the Drawings, it shall mean “that situations exist where either one or both conditions occur or are required and shall not be interpreted to permit on option on the part of the Contractor.

6. Approve – Where used in conjunction with Engineer’s/Architect’s response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term “approved” will be held to limitations to Engineer’s/Architect’s responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will “approval” by Engineer/Architect be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract documents or to extend Engineer’s/Architect’s responsibility into Contractor’s area of construction supervision and job safety.



7. As required – Where “as required” is used in these Specifications or on the drawings, it shall mean “that situations exist that are not necessarily described in detail or indicated, that may cause the Contractor certain complications in performing the work described or indicated. These complications entail the normal coordination activities expected of the Contractor where multiple trades are involved and new or existing construction causes deviations to otherwise simplistic approaches to the work to be performed. The term shall not be interpreted to permit an option on the part of the Contractor to achieve the end result. The term shall also carry the general requirement that work be performed with good workmanship and that it result in a complete and operational system.

8. Furnish – The term “furnish” is used to mean “supply and deliver to project site, ready for

unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.” Where “furnish” applies to work for which the installation is not otherwise specified, “furnish” in such case shall mean, “furnish and install”.

9. Install – The term “install” is used to describe operations at project site including “unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operation.”

10. Provide – The term “provide” means “ to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use”.

11. Detail – The term “detail” when used in the context of a drawing element used to isolate the work requirements of a specific element in the project (e.g. Exhaust Fan Detail), is

interchangeable with the terms “diagram”, “schematic”, etc. A Detail is generally conceptual in nature and is not to be construed as a literal, prescriptive, comprehensive set of instructions. The responsibility remains with the Contractor to adapt the information in the drawings to the project such that the work is fully integrated with all project requirements, fully operational, and performed in a manner that meets code and generally accepted industry standard practices. Division 22 and 23 Disciplines – In various places on the drawings, work is called for to be done by a certain trade (e.g. Div. 23 Sheet Metal, Div. 23 Controls). These indications carry with them, the understanding that the project contract is with the General or Prime Contractor. The ultimate responsibility for the accomplishment of work lies with the General or Prime Contractor and these indications shall be regarded as suggestions based on standard practice and discipline competence. The General or Prime Contractor will be held responsible and shall thus carry the decision making authority for the accomplishment of all work on the drawings.

1.6 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Fees and Costs: If, during the course of the construction, a need arises to buy utilities, the

Contractor shall pay all fees attendant thereto. If City or privately owned utility piping or electrical cable needs to be extended, relocated, or terminated, the Contractor will pay all permits and construction/inspection fees associated with that particular work. The Contractor shall remove and properly dispose of all construction waste.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. All mechanics shall be skilled in their respective trade. B. All welders shall be certified in accordance with the ASME Boiler Test Code, Section IX,

latest issue.

1.8 QUALIFICATION PROCEDURES



A. The storage, handling, and transportation of all refrigerants, oils, lubricants, etc. shall be accomplished in strict compliance with all State, local, and Federal Regulations including all requirements set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for the safe handling of regulated refrigerants and materials. The Contractor shall utilize qualified and/or certified personnel and equipment as prescribed by these requirements. In no situation shall any refrigerant be discharged to the atmosphere.

1.9 GUARANTEE – WARRANTY A. The following guarantee is a part of the specifications and shall be binding on the

Contractor: “The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees

to replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer Architect any part of the installation that may fail within a period of one year after date established below, provided that such failure is due to defects in the materials or workmanship or failure to follow the specifications and drawings. Warranty of the Contractor-furnished equipment or systems shall begin on the date of substantial completion.”

B. The extent of guarantees or warranties by Equipment and/or Materials Manufacturers shall not diminish the requirements of the Contractor’s guarantee-warranty to the Owner.

1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Compliance: The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation.

B. The interrelation of the Specifications, the Drawings, and the schedules are as follows: The Specifications determine the nature and setting of the various materials, the Drawings establish the quantities, dimensions and details, and the schedules give the performance characteristics. If the Contractor requires additional clarification, he shall request it in writing, following the contractually prescribed information flow requirements.

C. Should the Drawings or Specifications conflict within themselves, or with each other, the better quality, or greater size or quantity of work or materials shall be performed or furnished.

D. Capacities of equipment furnished may exceed those specified as long as there is no detriment to the project as deemed by the Engineer (e.g. short cycling, exceeding electrical limits). There is no tolerance for shortage of capacity. Equipment must at least meet 100% of the design condition.

1.10 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The mechanical schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner and Engineer/Architect.

1.11 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS – Procedures

A. General – Within thirty days after the date of Contract award or work order, whichever is later, and before purchasing or starting installation of materials or equipment, the Contractor shall submit for review, a complete list of suppliers, contractors and manufacturers for all



materials and equipment which will be submitted for incorporation into the project. The list shall be arranged in accordance with the organization of the Specifications. This initial list shall include the manufacturer’s name and type or catalog number as required to identify the quality of material or equipment proposed. This list will be reviewed by the Engineer and the Owner and will be returned to the Contractor with comments as to which items are acceptable without further submittal data and which items will require detailed submittal data for further review and subsequent approval. The initial list shall be submitted as herein specified. Materials and equipment requiring detailed submittal data shall be submitted with sufficient data to indicate that all requirements of these Specifications have been met and samples shall be furnished when requested. All manufacturer’s data used as part of the submittal shall have all inapplicable features crossed out or deleted in a manner that will clearly indicate exactly what is to be furnished and key specified features shall be highlighted.

B. Products Submittal List: Include Products specified in the following Sections as well as all equipment listed on the equipment schedules: a. Specification Section for Piping, Valves and Fittings b. Specification Section for Sleeves, Flashings, Supports and Anchors c. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification d. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping e. Specification Section for Ductwork f. Specification Section for Ductwork Accessories

C. Timeliness – The burden of timeliness in the complete cycle of submittal data, shop drawings, and sample processing is on the Contractor. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of two (2) weeks time frame for review of each submission by the office of the design discipline involved after receipt of such submissions by that design discipline. The Contractor is responsible for allowing sufficient time in the construction schedule to cover the aforementioned cycles of data processing, including time for all re-submittal cycles on unacceptable materials, equipment, etc. covered by the data submitted. Construction delays and/or lack of timeliness in the above regard are the responsibility of the Contractor and will not be considered in any request for scheduled construction time extensions and/or additional costs to the Owner.

D. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation; local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts.

E. Acceptance of materials and equipment will be based on manufacturer’s published data and will be tentative subject to the submission of complete shop drawings indicating compliance with the Contract documents and that adequate and acceptable clearance for entry, servicing, and maintenance will exist. Acceptance of materials and equipment under this provision shall not be construed as authorizing any deviations from the Specifications, unless the attention of the Engineer has been directed in writing to the specific deviations. Data submitted shall not contain unrelated information unless all pertinent information is properly identified.

F. Submittals 1. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of

related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. 2. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. Highlight and provide

drawing and specification references for all features and values. Inapplicable features shall be crossed out.

a. Submittals shall be grouped and submitted in a three ring binder in a manner where all project submittals can be kept under one cover. Supplemental submittal information shall be marked and dated for coordination with the original submittal, including Engineer’s comments and referencing.

G. Fabrication Shop Drawings



1. Submit Shop Drawings whenever (1) equipment proposed varies in physical size and arrangement from that indicated on the Drawings. Rearrangement of equipment as laid out, will only be considered as a last resort. Submitting on equipment that does not properly fit is cause for rejection. Requests to rearrange must be forwarded to the Engineer before submitting. The Contractor shall provide detailed drawings of any space approved for rearrangement, (2) where tight spaces require extreme coordination between ductwork, piping, conduit, and other equipment, (3) where called for elsewhere in these Specifications; and (4) where specifically requested by the Engineer. Fabrication Drawings shall be made at no additional charge to the Owner or the Engineer. Shop drawings shall be required for duct, piping, structural and architectural coordination at all air handling unit locations to indicate all runs to and from these units. Shop drawings shall also be required for piping layout in the mechanical rooms.

2. Eight (unless otherwise indicated) complete sets of coordination drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the scheduled start of the work in the area illustrated by the drawings, for the purpose of showing the Contractor’s planned method of installation. The objectives of such drawings are to promote carefully planned work sequence and proper coordination, in order to assure the expeditious solutions of problems, and the installation of lines and equipment as contemplated by the Contract documents while avoiding or minimizing additional costs to the Contractor and to the Owner.

3. In the event the Contractor, in coordinating the various installations and in planning the method of installation, finds a conflict in location or elevation of any of the mechanical systems, with the structural items or with other construction items, such conflicts shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer.

1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. It is not the intent of the Drawings and/or Specifications to discriminate against an “approved equal” product as produced by another manufacturer. However, the list manufacturers are known acceptable providers. Substitutions will require prior approval 10 days prior to bid date. Prior approval requests shall be done in “Submittal” format indicating complete dimensional, capacity, and specification data. Approvals will be listed by Addendum. Specific manufacturer’s products are mentioned to set a definite standard for acceptance and to serve as a reference in comparison with other products. The successful manufacturer or supplier shall meet all of the provisions of the appropriate specification(s) and shall also be held to the reasonable standard of the specified manufacturer’s product.

B. When a manufacturer’s name appears in these Specifications, it is not to be construed that the manufacturer is unconditionally acceptable as a provider of equipment for this project. Nor should the named manufacturer infer that he is exempt from any specified requirement.

C. The specified products have been used in preparing the Drawings and Specifications and thus establish minimum qualities with which substitutes must at least equal to be considered acceptable. The burden of proof of equality rests with the Contractor. The decision of the designer is final.

D. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the proposed substitute item. In some cases, samples of both the specified item and the proposed item shall be provided for comparison purposes.

E. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective, or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended within the guarantee period, this material or equipment shall be replaced with the material or equipment specified at no additional cost to the Owner.



F. If a proposed substitution has been rejected a third time, it will no longer be considered. Further considerations on the equipment item shall be with the specified item or pre-approved equal.

1.13 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new, free from all defects, suitable for the

intended use, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the best standard practice for the type of work involved. All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective trades, and the installations shall provide a neat, precise appearance. Materials and/or equipment damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged prior to installation shall not be repaired at the job site but shall be replaced with new materials and/or equipment.

B. The responsibility for the furnishing of the proper equipment and/or material and seeing that it is installed as intended by the manufacturer rests entirely upon the Contractor who shall request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of specific manufacturers during the installation. The Contractor shall not begin work on any item without a work plan that includes a scheme for a complete and operational system. Flame Spread Properties Of Materials – Materials and adhesives incorporated in this project shall conform to NFPA Standard 255 (1984), "Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". The classification shall not exceed a flame spread rating of 25 for all materials, adhesives, finishes, etc., specified for each system, and shall not exceed a smoke developed rating of 50.

1.14 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

The following agencies of jurisdiction, codes, standards, and industry specifications should be considered integral parts of the project documents. The Contractor will be expected to be familiar with and to adhere to the requirements of this information. A. It is required that the installation shall meet the minimum standards prescribed in the latest

editions of the following listed codes and standards, which are made a part of these Specifications. All referenced codes and standards shall be those current at the date of issue of the design documents.

B. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) – 1. NFPA No. 54, Gas Appliances, Piping, National Fuel Gas Code. 2. NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code. 3. NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA No. 258, Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke

Generation of Solid Materials. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) –

1. A40.8, National Plumbing Code. 2. B31.1, Power Piping. 3. B9.1, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. American Gas Association Publications (AGA) – Directory of Approved Gas Appliances and Tested Accessories.Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI) – All standards related to refrigeration and air conditioning equipment and piping furnished under these Specifications.

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) – All current editions of applicable manuals and standards (See Sections 23890 and 23910).

E. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) – All current editions of applicable manuals and standards.



F. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) – All current editions of applicable manuals and standards.

G. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) – All current editions of applicable manuals and standards.

H. City of local Fire Departments as may be applicable to construction on these sites. I. International Building Code (includes the New Mexico Building Code and Uniform

Mechanical and Uniform Plumbing Codes). J. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). K. ADA and ANSI Standards – All work shall be in accord with all regulations and

requirements of the Standards and Specifications for Handicapped and Disabled for the Construction of Public Buildings and Facilities in the State of Texas Usable by Physically Handicapped and Disabled persons, ANSI Standards and the requirements of the American Disabilities Act.

L. Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL) M. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) N. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) O. Refer to Specification Sections hereinafter bound for additional Codes and Standards. P. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable State and National codes,

Specifications, and industry standards. In all cases where Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for a particular type material, such material shall comply with these standards. Evidence of compliance shall be the UL "label" or "listing" under Re-Examination Service.

Q. The Contract Documents are intended to comply with the aforementioned rules and regulations; however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer/Architect in writing of said discrepancies and apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the execution of a contract, any additional work required for compliance with said regulations shall be paid for as covered by Division 1 of these Contract Documents, providing no work of fabrication of materials has been accomplished in a manner of noncompliance. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable codes, rules and regulations, the Contractor who performed such work shall bear all costs arising in correcting these deficiencies to comply with said rules and regulations.

1.15 GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Storage at Site: The Contractor shall not receive material or equipment at the job site until there is suitable space provided to properly protect equipment from rust, drip, humidity, and dust damage.

B. Capacities shall be not less than those indicated, but shall otherwise be such that no component or system becomes inoperative or is damaged because of startup or other overload or underload conditions.

C. Conformance with Agency Requirements: Where materials or equipment are specified to be approved, listed, tested, or labeled by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or constructed and/or tested in accordance with the standards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or the Air Moving and Conditioning Association, or any similar listing or testing requirement, the Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this Section of the Specifications conform to such requirements. For example, the label of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., applied to the item will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to such requirements. The ASME stamp or the AMCA label will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to the respective requirements.



D. Nameplates: Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment. All data on nameplates shall be legible at the time of Final Inspection.

E. Prevention of Rust: Standard factory finish will be acceptable on equipment specified by model number; otherwise, surfaces of ferrous metal shall be given a rust inhibiting coating. The treatment shall withstand 200 hours in salt spray fog test, in accordance with Method 6061 of Federal Standard No. 141. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall show no signs of wrinkling or cracking and no signs of rust creepage beyond 1/8" on either side of the scratch mark. Where rust inhibitor coating is specified hereinafter, any treatment that will pass the above test is acceptable unless a specific coating is specified except that coal tar or asphalt type coating will not be acceptable unless so stated for a specific item. Where steel is specified to be hot-dip galvanized, mill-galvanized sheet steel may be used provided all raw edges are painted with a zinc-pigmented paint conforming to Military Specification MIL-P-26922.

F. Protection from Moving Parts: Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded for personnel protection.

G. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premises and become thoroughly familiar with all details of the work and working conditions, to verify all dimensions in the field, and to advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work. Adjustments to the work required in order to facilitate a coordinated installation shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner or the Engineer.

1.16 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES

A. See Specification Section for Supports and Anchors 1.17 SLEEVES, INSERTS, AND FASTENINGS

A. See Specification Section for Supports and Anchors

1.18 ELECTRICAL ARRANGEMENT OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall note that the electrical design and Drawings are based on the equipment

scheduled and indicated on the Drawings, and should any mechanical equipment be provided requiring changes to the electrical design, the required electrical changes shall be made at no cost to the Owner.

B. The Electrical Trades shall provide all interconnecting wiring for the installation of all power to equipment. By code, all equipment must be served and protected by proper electrical equipment such as disconnect switches and starters. Further, it is the intent of the design that all equipment be served and protected in a manner that meets code. All combination starters, individual starters, disconnect switches and other motor starting and safety apparatus not specifically scheduled or specified as provided by the equipment manufacturer under the scope of Division 22 and 23, or otherwise indicated under the scope of Division 25, shall be implied to be furnished with these components under Division 22 and 23.

1.19 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Notify the Engineer if site conditions indicate that locations should be changed.



B. In the event that changes are necessary, prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. See section on fabrication shop drawings for additional requirements on this item. Obtain permission of Owner before proceeding.

1.20 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES AND WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

A. The Contractor shall be familiar with and responsible for mechanical requirements that may appear throughout the entirety of the specifications and drawings. Each trade, subcontractor, and/or Contractor must work in harmony with the various other trades, subcontractors and/or Contractors on the job as may be required to facilitate the progress to the best advantage of the job as a whole. Each trade, subcontractor, and/or Contractor must pursue its work promptly and carefully so as not to delay the general progress of the job. This Contractor shall work in harmony with Contractors working under other contracts on the premises.

1.21 SUPERVISION

A. Each Contractor and subcontractor shall keep a competent superintendent or foreman on the job at all times. Only licensed master, journeyman and helpers shall be allowed to perform the work.

B. It shall be the responsibility of each superintendent to study all Drawings and familiarize himself with the work to be done by other trades. He shall coordinate his work with other trades and before material is fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not cause an interference with another trade. Where interferences are encountered, they shall be resolved at the job site by the superintendents involved. Where interferences cannot be resolved without major changes to the Drawings, the matter shall be referred to the A/E for ruling.

1.22 SITE OBSERVATION

A. Site observation by the Engineer/Architect is for the express purpose of verifying compliance by the Contractor with the Contract Documents, and shall not be construed as construction supervision nor indication of approval of the manner or location in which the work is being performed, or as being a safe practice or place.

1.23 RECORDS FOR OWNER

A. The Contractor shall maintain a set of “blueline” prints in the Field Office for the sole

purpose of recording “demolition” conditions. Daily note all changes made in these Drawings in connection with the final project condition including exact dimensioned locations of all underground utilities, services and systems affected by the work and all uncovered existing active and inactive piping related to the building.

B. At Contract completion the Contractor shall provide a set of reproducible drawings. The Contractor shall transfer the information from the “blueline” prints maintained as described above, and turn over this neatly marked set of reproducible Drawings representing the “as installed” work to the Engineer/Architect for verification and subsequent transmittal to the Owner. These Drawings shall include as a minimum:

1. Addendum written drawing changes. 2. Addendum supplementary drawings.

3. Accurate, dimensioned locations of all underground utilities, services and systems. 4. Identification of equipment work shown on Alternates as to whether alternates were

accepted and work actually performed. 5. Change Order written Drawing changes.



6. Change Order supplementary Drawings. C. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall accumulate during the progress of the job, 3

copies of the following data, prepared in a neat brochure or packet folder and turned over to the Engineer for review, and subsequent delivery to the Owner.

1. All warranties, guarantees, and manufacturer’s directions on equipment and material covered by the Contract.

2. Four (4) sets of operating and maintenance instructions for heating and cooling and other mechanical and electrical systems. Instructions shall also include recommended preventative maintenance and seasonal changeover procedures.

3. Valve tag charts and diagrams specified herein. 4. Control diagrams representing “as installed” conditions. 5. Certifications of tests such as piping system pressure tests, backflow prevention

certification and required factory testing of equipment. 6. Copies of approved Shop Drawings. 7. Any an all other data and/or Drawings required as submittals during construction. 8. Repair parts list of all major items and equipment including name, address and

telephone number of local supplier or agent. 9. Testing and Balancing Report. 10. “As-Built Drawings.” 11. Documentation on Start-up and Training.

D. All of the above data shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect for approval, and shall be corrected as instructed by the Engineer/Architect before submission of the final request for payment.

1.24 EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen, and shall be responsible for repairing or replacing such loss or damage. The Contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, and perform other services required for the care, protection and in service maintenance of all plumbing, heating, air conditioning, and ventilating services for the existing facility. The Contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices, as required to protect personnel from injury, removing all such temporary protection upon completion of the work.

B. The Contractor shall provide temporary or new services to all existing facilities as required to maintain their proper operation when normal services are disrupted as a result of the work being accomplished under this project.

C. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, Contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected.

D. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are indicated to be removed, all Contractors shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Engineer all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing construction. This is to include but is not limited to temperature controls system devices, electrical switches, relays, fixtures, piping, conduit, etc.

E. Outages of services as required by the new installation will be permitted but only at a time approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall allow the Owner two weeks in order to schedule required outages. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the contract amount.

1.25 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION



A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated.

B. All items, which are to be relocated, shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean, repair, and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved.

C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Service lines to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities, which must remain in operation during the construction period, shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified.

1.26 ALTITUDE RATINGS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all specified equipment capacities are for actual site altitude above sea level and adjustments to manufacturer’s ratings must be made accordingly.

1.27 ROOF/EQUIPMENT INTERFACE

A. Piping – Penetration shall be accomplished with factory-made assemblies designed specifically for the purpose. The use of pitch pans or pitch pockets is not allowed.

B. Ductwork without Equipment – Unless otherwise indicated, penetration shall be accomplished with a factory-made insulated roof curb designed for use as duct penetration through roof.

C. Ductwork with Equipment – Each piece of roof mounted equipment such as packaged rooftop air conditioners, air handlers, shall be provided and installed with an insulated roof curb designed to mate with the equipment and provide a weatherproof enclosure. In the event that pre-insulated curb is not available, an un-insulated curb is acceptable if the Contractor provides and installs field insulation per the manufacturer’s instructions. Contractor shall coordinate the roof curb(s) with the Roofing Contractor for installation.

D. General – All roof flashing assemblies, equipment supports and roof curbs shall be closely coordinated with other work through the Roofing Contractor to insure that the flashing, canting, insulation type, installation and location, etc., is correct and appropriate for the particular roof construction type.

E. Each roof curb shall be selected and provided so that the top of the curb shall be level after installation. The curb shall provide a minimum clearance of 10 inches between the top of the



finished roof surface and the top of the wood nailer, continuous around the curb perimeter unless noted otherwise.

F. Each roof penetration location shown on the drawing is approximate. Refer to the Architectural and Structural drawing for the structural openings. Refer to cutting and patching section of this Specification for more information.

G. Provide each roof curb with other options as scheduled on the drawings.

1.28 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall review and become familiar with all the project documents as they pertain to fire and smoke rating requirements.

B. All penetrations of fire or smoke barriers shall be sealed with dampers, sleeves (if any), insulation (if any), and vibration isolation (if any) that maintain the fire or smoke resistance of the barrier in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.

C. Contractor shall verify locations and type of all partition penetrations from the drawings. Sealing material and methods shall be per UL recommendations.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE PRESSURE TESTS

A. See the Specification Sections relevant to each type piping system for testing requirements of the system. Also comply with any code required testing procedures.

B. Where leaks occur, the pipe shall be repaired and the tests repeated. No leaks shall be corrected by peening. Defective piping joints shall be removed and replaced.

C. The Engineer shall be notified in advance of the tests so that the test can be witnessed. Tests shall be performed with a chart recorder and charts shall be submitted to the Engineer. If engineer cannot be physically present at time of test, contractor shall proceed and provide all necessary documentation.

D. These test requirements shall be considered in concert with the requirements indicated in sections specific to these systems.

E. Roof Drains – All openings shall be tightly sealed. A stand pipe shall be created as necessary and the system shall be tested in its entirety or in segments. Each element in the system shall be tested to a 10 foot water column for 24 hours. Each joint shall be tight and there shall be no loss in water level. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements.

F. Waste and Vent Piping - All openings shall be tightly sealed. A stand pipe shall be created as necessary and the system shall be tested in its entirety or in segments. Each element in the system shall be tested to a 10 foot water column for 24 hours. Each joint shall be tight and there shall be no loss in water level. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements.

G. Natural Gas – For system pressure less than 1 psi – Test at 10 psi or pressure required by per local codes, whichever is greater, for 24 hour. For system pressure 1 psi or greater – Test at 100 psi for 24 hours. All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be filled with air and pressurized to 10psi or pressure required by per local codes, whichever is greater, for systems that operate at less than 1psig, and 100psi for systems that operate at 1psig or greater. The test shall be documented on a chart recorder and held for 24 hours with no loss in pressure. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirement.

H. Note the following items in particular (International Fuel Gas Code): I. Gas Code: 107.2 – Tests shall be made by the permit holder and observed by the code

official.



J. Gas Code: 406.1.3 – Systems valves shall not be used as test stops, unless it can be demonstrated that the valve is rated to withstand the test pressure.

K. Gas Code: 406.4 – Test pressure shall be measured with a device designed and calibrated to read, record, and indicate a loss in pressure during the test period.

L. Domestic Hot and Cold Water – All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be filled with water and/or air and pressurized to 150 psig. The test shall be documented on a chart recorded and held for 24 hours with no loss in pressure. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements. Also see disinfection requirements.

M. Fire Protection Service Mains – Hydrostatic test conforming to NFPA 13, 24 and AWWA C600. All piping and appurtenances subject to system pressure shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 PSI and shall hold such pressure for a period of no less than 2 hours. This test shall be recorded on a chart recorder and filed with the owner’s closeout documents.

N. The engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of this procedure so that it may be witnessed. Regardless of whether the engineer is available to witness the results, the contractor shall document the procedure and the results and provide it to the engineer.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

A. The manufacturer's published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping, wiring, start-up, testing and operation of all equipment and material. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturers' directions, and shall obtain the Engineer’s instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturers' directions or such instructions from the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies.

3.3 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT

A. The size of mechanical and electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Shop Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement (see other specification sections related to fabrication shop drawings.

B. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part and incompliance with code.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question.

B. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building.



C. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

D. The contract shall also protect the facility in general. For example, damage to the facility caused by an unprotected roof opening or wall penetration will be the responsibility of this Contractor.

3.5 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Where to Conceal: All pipes, conduits, etc., shall be concealed in pipe chases, walls, furred spaces, or above the ceilings of the building unless otherwise indicated. Suitable access shall be provided at all access points such as service valves.

B. Where to Expose: In mechanical rooms, janitor's closets tight against pan soffits in exposed "Tee" structures, or storage spaces, but only where necessary, piping may be run exposed. All exposed piping shall be run in the most aesthetic, inconspicuous manner, and parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

C. Support: All piping, ducts and conduits shall be adequately and properly supported from the building structure by means of hanger rods or clamps to walls as herein specified.

D. Maintaining Clearance: Where limited space is available above the ceilings below concrete beams or other deep projections, pipe and conduit shall be sleeved through the projection where it crosses, rather than hung below them in a manner to provide maximum above-floor clearance. Sleeves shall be as herein specified. Approval shall be obtained from the Engineer for each penetration not indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. All pipe, conduits, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts, pipes and conduits run exposed in machinery and equipment rooms shall be installed parallel to the building lines, except that piping, flues, etc., shall be sloped to obtain the proper pitch. Piping, and ducts run in furred ceilings, etc., shall be similarly installed, except as otherwise shown. All pipe openings shall be kept closed until the systems are closed with final connections. 1. Prior to the installation of any ceiling material, gypsum, plaster or acoustical board,

the Contractor shall notify the construction supervisor so that arrangement can be made for an inspection of the above-ceiling area about to be “sealed” off. The Contractor shall give as much advance notice as possible no less than ten (10) working days.

2. All above-ceiling areas will be subject to an inspection before ceiling panels are installed, or installation is otherwise concealed from view. All mechanical and electrical work at and above the ceiling, including items supported by the ceiling grid, such as air inlets or outlets and lighting fixtures, shall be complete and installed in accordance with Contract requirements, including power to lighting fixtures, fans, and other powered items. Adequate lighting shall be provided to permit thorough inspection of all above-ceiling items. Areas to be included and time of inspection shall be coordinated with the Engineer.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction. Coordinate all cutting and patching with the requirements of the Engineer/Architect. Any mention of “repair, restoration, replacement…” in the following sections apply to only those areas described by architect to remain after the demolition portion of this project is complete.

B. Methods of cutting: Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Engineer/Architect. Impact-type equipment shall not be used except where specifically acceptable to the



Engineer/Architect. Openings in pre-cast concrete slabs for pipes, conduits, outlet boxes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size.

C. Restoration: All openings shall be restored to "as-new" condition under the appropriate Specification Section for the materials involved, and shall match remaining surrounding materials and/or finishes. Coordinate all finish work with the requirements of the Engineer/Architect.

D. Masonry: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

E. Plaster: All mechanical work in areas containing plaster shall be completed prior to the application of the finish plaster coat. Cutting of finish plaster coat will not be permitted.

F. Special Note: No cutting, boring, or excavating, which will weaken the structure, shall be undertaken.

3.7 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

A. Excavation (See Division 0 and 1 for special requirements related to excavation and trenching):

1. The Contractor shall thoroughly review the entire project set for site excavation work. The contractor shall note coordination items such as structural elements and site drainage and submit points of concern to the architect.

2. The Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors shall perform all excavations of every description, for their particular installations and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings and/ or required for the installation of piping, conduit, utility systems, etc. All exterior lines shall be installed with a minimum cover of 24”, unless otherwise indicated. Generally, more cover shall be provided if grade will permit. All excavation materials not required for backfill or fill shall be removed and wasted as acceptable to the Construction Inspector. All excavations shall be made only by open cut. The banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible and where required, shall be properly sheeted and braced. Trenches shall be not less than 12” wider nor more than 16” wider than the outside edges of the pipe to be laid therein, and shall be excavated true to line so that a clear space no t less than 6” or more than 8” in width is provided on each side of the pipe. For sewers, the maximum width of trench specified applies to the width at and below the level may be made as wide as necessary for sheeting and bracing, and the proper installation of the work.

3. The bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide proper fall and uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil or 2” if sand fill at every point along its entire length, except for portions of the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints. Bell holes shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded. Where inverts are not shown, grading shall be determined by the National Plumbing Code for the service intended and the size used. Bell holes for sewer title and water pipe shall be excavated only to an extent sufficient to permit accurate work I the making of the joints and to insure that the pipe, for a maximum of its length, will rest upon the prepared bottom of the trench. Depressions for joints other than bell-and spigot shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the joint manufacturer for the particular type of joint used. In general, grading for electrical ductbanks and conduits shall be from building to manhole, and from a high point between manholes to each manhole. Special pipe beds shall be provided as specified hereinafter.



4. The lower 4” of the pipe trenches measuring from an overhead line set parallel to the grade line of the sewer shall be excavated only a few feet in advance to the pipe laying, by men especially skilled in this type of work. Where damage is likely to result from withdrawing sheeting, the sheeting shall be left in place. Expect at locations where excavation of rock from the bottom of trenches is required, care shall be taken not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, the rock shall be excavated to a minimum overdepth of 6” below the trench depths specified. The over depth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such soil shall be remove to a depth and for the trench lengths required, and then backfilled to trench bottom grade, as hereinafter specified, with sand.

5. All grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be controlled to prevent surface ground water from flowing into the excavations. Any water accumulated in the excavations shall be removed by pumping or other acceptable method. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stacked in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edges of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling shall be wasted and removed form the job site as directed by the Construction Inspector.

6. All shoring and sheeting required to perform and protect the excavations and to safeguard employees and/ or adjacent structures shall be provided.

7. Excavate as required under the building in order that all piping, ductwork, etc., shall clear the structure a minimum of 12” for a distance of 24” on either side. Edges of such excavations shall slope at an angle of not over 45 degrees with the horizontal unless otherwise approved by the Construction Inspector. The bottom of such excavation shall be graded to drain in a manner acceptable to the Construction Inspector.

8. Trenches for cast iron drain, storm, water and sewer lines inside the building shall be properly excavated, following, in general, the procedures set out of r exterior lines. Where floors are to be poured over these lines, they shall be backfilled, tamped and settled with water. Where no flooring is to cover the lines, they shall be backfilled to form a level grade.

9. All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations becomes the property of the contractor, and shall be disposed of at the expense of the contractor, at a legal disposal site, off the site.

B. Backfilling: 1. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until

piping, utilities systems, etc., as installed are certified by the Owner’s inspector to conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with sand to a depth of 12 inches above the top of the pipe. The next layer and subsequent layers of backfill may be excavated material approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones larger than 1 ½” in diameter, flooded until the pipe has cover of not less than one foot. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trenches, moistened, and tamped or flooded in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Any trenches improperly boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Any trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed out.

2. Backfill under concrete slabs-on-fill shall be as specified above, shall be gravel, or shall be other such materials more suitable for the application. Installation and compaction shall be as required for compatibility with adjacent materials.



C. Opening and Reclosing Pavement and Lawns: Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives, other existing pavement, or lawns, such surfaces shall be cut as required to install new lines and to make new connections to existing lines. The sized of the cut shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled and flooded, the area shall be patched, using materials to match those cut out. The patches shall thoroughly bond with the original surfaces and shall be level with them, and shall meet all the requirements established by the authorities having jurisdiction over such areas.

D. Excavation in Vicinity of Trees: All trees including low hanging limbs within the immediate area of construction shall be adequately protected to a height of at least 5ft. to prevent damage from the construction operations and/ or equipment. All excavation within the outermost limb radius of all trees shall be accomplished with extreme care. All roots located within this outermost limb radius shall be brought to the attention of the Construction Inspector before they are cut or damaged in any way. All stumps and roots encountered in the excavation, which are not within the outermost limb radius of existing trees, shall be cut back to a distance of not less than 18” form the outside of any concrete structure or pipeline. No chips, parts of stumps and roots have been cut out of the excavation, clean compacted dyr bank sand shall be backfilled and tamped.

3.8 ACCESS DOORS

A. General: This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of mechanical equipment or devices.

B. Doors: Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Accudor or Milcor manufacture, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non-plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surface of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be of similar construction as noted above, except they shall be of stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 12" x 12" in size, but will otherwise be required to provide full and free access such that valves fully stroke, equipment doors open fully, and all service points on the equipment can be reached and parts can be replaced. Access doors shall have keyed locking mechanism approved by the school.

3.9 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION

A. When any piece of mechanical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he follows the recommended start-up procedures, and properly supervises the operation, and has the Owner and Engineer’s written permission to do so. The warranty period, however, shall not commence until the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first.

B. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. The contractor shall provide a full set of new filters for all new equipment immediately prior to TAB work and a full set of new filters immediately upon final acceptance of the project by the owner.

3.10 CHECKING AND TESTING MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT

A. Before the work is accepted, an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the installed materials and/or equipment shall personally inspect the installation, start-up and operation of his materials and/or equipment to determine that it is properly installed and in proper



operating order. The representative shall also conduct training sessions for each piece of equipment as required by the Owner. The qualifications of the representative shall be appropriate to the technical requirement of the installation. The qualifications of the representative shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The decision of the Engineer concerning the appropriateness of the representative shall be final. Testing and checking shall be accomplished during the course of the work where required by work being concealed, and at the completion of the work otherwise. In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a signed statement from each representative certifying as follows: “I certify that the materials and/or equipment listed below have been personally inspected by the undersigned authorized manufacturer’s representative and is properly installed and operating in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations”.

B. Check inspections shall include plumbing equipment, heating, air conditioning equipment, insulation, ventilating equipment, controls, mechanical equipment and such other items hereinafter specified or specifically designated by the Engineer.

C. Start-up, Testing and Checking shall be seasonally deferred where required such that it can be operated under load.

3.11 COOPERATION AND CLEANUP

A. It shall be the responsibility of each trade to cooperate fully with the other trades on the job to help keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment and materials and shall clean his debris from the job. Upon the completion of the job, each trade shall immediately remove all of his tools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by that portion of the work.

3.12 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. All equipment, piping, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Division 22/23 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted as indicated.

B. All equipment furnished by the mechanical subcontractor shall be delivered to the job with a suitable factory protective finish and shall be painted (if required), after installation, with the color hereinafter specified. The following materials shall not be painted: copper, galvanized metal, stainless steel, fiberglass, and PVC.

C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean.

D. Aluminum jacketing on insulation shall not be painted. E. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be afforded to

the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible due to the painting operation.

3.13 TESTS

A. The Contractor shall make, at no additional cost to the Owner, any tests deemed necessary by the Engineer, the inspection departments having jurisdiction, and in the National Fire Protection Association, ASTM, etc. Standards listed. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials, and labor for making such tests, Reasonable amounts of fuel and electrical energy costs for system tests will be paid by the Contractor.

B. Additional tests specified hereinafter under the various Specification Sections shall be made. C. The Engineer shall be notified in writing at least 10 working days before each test and other

Specification requirements requiring action on the part of the Engineer. All equipment shall



b placed in operation and tested for proper automatic control requirements before the balancing agency starts their work. These activities will be seasonally deferred as required to properly operate, load and test the equipment (e.g., evaporative coolers and chillers shall be tested in the summer; boilers and furnace sections shall be tested in the winter.)

D. Maintain Log of Tests as hereinafter specified. E. See Specifications hereinafter for additional tests and requirements. F. Roof Drains – All openings shall be tightly sealed. A stand pipe shall be created as

necessary and the system shall be tested in its entirety or in segments. Each element in the system shall be tested to a 10 foot water column for 24 hours. Each joint shall be tight and there shall be no loss in water level. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements.

G. Waste and Vent Piping - All openings shall be tightly sealed. A stand pipe shall be created as necessary and the system shall be tested in its entirety or in segments. Each element in the system shall be tested to a 10 foot water column for 24 hours. Each joint shall be tight and there shall be no loss in water level. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements.

H. Natural Gas – For system pressure less than 1 psi – Test at 10 psi or pressure required by per local codes, whichever is greater, for 24 hour. For system pressure 1 psi or greater – Test at 100 psi for 24 hours. All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be filled with air and pressurized to 10psi or pressure required by per local codes, whichever is greater, for systems that operate at less than 1psig, and 100psi for systems that operate at 1psig or greater. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirement.

I. Note the following items in particular (International Fuel Gas Code): J. Gas Code: 107.2 – Tests shall be made by the permit holder and observed by the code

official. K. Gas Code: 406.1.3 – Systems valves shall not be used as test stops, unless it can be

demonstrated that the valve is rated to withstand the test pressure. L. Gas Code: 406.4 – Test pressure shall be measured with a device designed and calibrated to

read, record, and indicate a loss in pressure during the test period. M. Domestic Hot and Cold Water – All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be

filled with water and/or air and pressurized to 150 psig. The test shall be documented on a chart recorded and held for 24 hours with no loss in pressure. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements. Also see disinfection requirements.

N. Fire Protection Service Mains – Hydrostatic test conforming to NFPA 13, 24 and AWWA C600. All piping and appurtenances subject to system pressure shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 PSI and shall hold such pressure for a period of no less than 2 hours. This test shall be recorded on a chart recorder and filed with the owner’s closeout documents.

O. The engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of this procedure so that it may be witnessed. Regardless of whether the engineer is available to witness the results, the contractor shall document the procedure and the results and provide it to the engineer.

3.14 LOG OF TESTS

A. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall include date, time, personnel, description, and extent of system tested, test conditions, test results, specified results, and other pertinent data. Data shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified under “Requirements for Final Acceptance”. All Test Log entries shall be legibly signed by the Project Contractor or his authorized job superintendent.

3.15 START-UP AND TRAINING

A. “Start-up” and “Training” shall be considered formal and distinct periods in the project, regardless of when they occur in the construction process.



B. Each piece of equipment and system (whether new, existing, by others, etc.) shall be started-up by authorized personnel using manufacturer’s recommendations or industry standard practice. Start-up procedures shall be neatly documented in report form and included with operation and maintenance materials for the project.

C. Each piece of equipment and system shall also include training designed to cover the depth of knowledge required to operate and maintain the respective item. Training sessions shall be documented and included with operation and maintenance materials for the project.

3.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

B. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

C. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, Subconsultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.

D. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

F. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.

G. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. H. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating

instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

I. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

J. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. K. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.

END OF SECTION


PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION 22 0516 - 1

SECTION 22 0516 - PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION


A. Flexible pipe connectors.

B. Expansion joints and compensators.

C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Fire Protection Piping.

B. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

C. Specification Sections for Hydronic Piping. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. MIL-E-17814E - Expansion Joints, Pipe, Slip-Type, Packed. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Verify that structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping are adequate. Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided, adequately protect system.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Specification Section 013300 for Submittals B. Product Data:

1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot (meter) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid.

C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external

controls.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.


A. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

A. Steel Piping – Hydronic Systems

1. Manufacturers - Metra-Flex Model MM or Equal

2. Inner Hose – Stainless Steel.

3. Exterior Sleeve – Single braided, thru 4”, double braided above, stainless steel.

4. Pressure Rating – 250 psig (862 kPa) Working pressure and 450 degrees F (232 degrees C).

5. Joint – As specified for pipe joints.

6. Size – Use pipe sized units.

7. Maximum offset – 3/8 inch (20mm) on each side of installed center line.

8. If Flexible Pipe Connectors are used on copper piping, copper and steel shall be

separated by di-electric unions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Construct spool pieces to exact size of flexible connection for future insertion.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Provide line size flexible connectors.

D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately

adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise.

E. Provide expansion loops, anchors, and guides as indicated on drawings.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES



A. Provide inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final

installing and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and connectors are performing satisfactorily.



GAGES AND METERS 22 0519 - 1

SECTION 22 0519 - GAGES AND METERS


A. Pressure gages.

B. Thermometers and Thermometer Supports.

C. Test Plugs.

D. Filter gages. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Sections for Hydronic and Plumbing Piping. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Division 01 Requirements for references and standards.

B. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.

C. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.

D. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.

E. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data, which indicates use operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specification Section for - Material and Equipment, Environmental conditions affecting products on site.



B. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Manufacturer – Marsh Model “W” or Equal.

B. Gage: ASME B40.1, with bourdon tube with adjustable pointer, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front recalibration adjustment, 4 ½” dial with black scale on white background.

C. Case: Painted Steel with chrome ring. D. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent. E. Scale: Psi. F. Range: Max indication shall be approximately twice the expected pressure such that the

unit will operate at “Mid Scale”. The Contractor shall furnish the expected system pressure. Gauges that do not operate at “Mid Scale” will be replaced.

G. ¼” Brass Ball Valve rated for 250 psi, and ¼” Brass Snubber.

2.2 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturer: Trerice – Model BX or Equal.

B. Thermometer: ASTM E1, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish and adjustable angle.

C. Size: 9 inch (229 mm) scale. D. Window: Clear Lexan. E. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch (20 mm) NPT, length to match application. F. Accuracy: ASTM E77 2 percent. G. Calibration: Degrees F.

2.3 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS

A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required.

2.4 TEST PLUGS

1. Manufacturers: Super Seal – Model 5525 or Equal.



2. 1/4 inch NPT or 1/2 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with:

3. EPDM core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F.

4. Minimum rating 1000 psi @ 250°F.


A. Specification Section for - Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install one pressure gage per pump, with taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump; pipe to gage. Coordinate this requirement with drawings and specification on pumps.

C. Install gage taps in piping; refer to Section for piping. See drawings for additional

locations and requirements.

D. Provide ball valve to isolate each gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation.

E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes

smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation.

F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service.

G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal

operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

H. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

I. Locate test plugs where indicated.



SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 0529 - 1

SECTION 22 0529 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports. B. Roof Pipe Supports C. Equipment bases and supports. D. Sleeves and seals. E. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.


A. Specification Section for Cast-In-Place Concrete, Equipment bases. B. Specification Section for Firestopping, Joint seals for piping and duct penetration of fire

rated assemblies. C. Specification Section for Painting. D. Specification Section for Piping Insulation. E. Specification Section for Equipment Insulation. F. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping B. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping D. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. E. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. F. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. G. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. H. ASTM B633- Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. I. ASTM A123- Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated

from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. J. ASTM A653 G90- Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section 01300 for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of all types of hangers. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support

hangers. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of

components.


A. Conform to applicable local code for support of plumbing piping. B. Hangers and supports used in fire protection piping systems shall be listed and labeled by

Underwriters Laboratories. C. Steel pipe hangers and supports should have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and

applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.



D. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP58.

E. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and support systems shall be as manufactured by B-Line Systems, Inc.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. HANGERS 1. Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller:

a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170. b. Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger, B-Line B3690.

c. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198R or hinged ring hanger, B3198H. d. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173 with B3222.

e. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104 or B3100. 2. Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger: a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3100. b. Pipe roll with sockets, B-Line B3114. c. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, B-Line B3110. 3. Insulated pipe- Hot or steam piping: a. 2 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 series. b. 2-1/2 inch and larger pipes:

i. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection. B-Lin B3110 with B3160-B3165 series.

ii. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-Line B3114 with B3160-B3165 series.

4. Insulated pipe- Cold or chilled water piping: a. 5 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal

shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 series. b. 6 inch and larger pipes:

i. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-Line B3114 with B3160-B3165 series.

ii. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection. B-Line B3110 with B3160-B3165 series.

PIPE CLAMPS 1. For flexibility in the hanger assembly due to horizontal movement, use pipe clamps

with weldless eye nuts, B-Line B3140 or B3142 with B3200. For insulated lines use double bolted pipe clamps, B-Line B3144 or B3146 with B3200.

MULTIPLE OR TRAPEZE HANGERS 1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr. 33

structural steel channel, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” minimum, B-Line B22 strut or stronger as required.

2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-Line

B2000 Series. 3. For pipes subjected to axial movement:



a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.

b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417. B. WALL SUPPORTS

1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller: a. Carbon steel hook, B-Line B3191. b. Carbon steel J-hanger, B-Line B3690. 2. Pipes larger than 4 inch:

a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps, B-Line B3064 and B2000 series. b. Welded steel brackets, B-Line B3066 or B3067, with roller chair or adjustable

steel yoke pipe roll. B-Line B3120 or 3110. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.

C. FLOOR SUPPORTS 1. Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping:

a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand sized for pipe elevation. B-Line B3093 and B3088T or B3090 and B3088. Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base stand.

2. Hot piping 6 inch and larger: a. Roller stand with base plate, B-Line, B3117SL b. Adjustable roller support and steel support sized for elevation B-Line B3124.

D. VERTICAL SUPPORTS 1. Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B3373.

E. COPPER TUBING SUPPORTS 1. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters.

a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170CT. b. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198RCT or hinged ring hanger B3198HCT. c. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173CT with B3222.

d. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104CT. 2. For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps, B-

Line B3373CT or B3373CTC. 3. For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for copper

tubing, B-Line B2000 series, or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps, B-Line BVT series.

F. PLASTIC PIPE SUPPORTS 1. V-Bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18gauge continuous support channel, B-

Line B3106 and B3106V. G. SUPPLEMENTARY STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS

1. Fabricate supports using structural quality steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by B-Line Systems. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” or greater as required by loading conditions. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.

2.3 UPPER ATTACHMENTS

A. BEAM CLAMPS 1. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel.

Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load configuration.

2. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws, B-Line B351L, or B3036L. Top flange c-clamps shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the top flange of structural shapes, B-Line B3034 or B3033. Refer to Manufacturers



recommendation for setscrew torque. Retaining straps shall be used to maintain the position on the beam where required.

B. TOGGLE BOLTS 1. Note that levels 1, 2, and 3 are hollow core concrete panels. Support

arrangement is critical. See structural, mechanical, and plumbing drawings for additional requirements.

2. Hanger supports shall be drilled into the hollow portion of concrete panels. Support shall be done with B-line ATH-37 or Equal Toggle Bolts. Arrange hangers for a maximum load of 200 pounds each.

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SUPPORTS

A. For air conditioning, and other vibrating system applications, use a clamp that has a vibration dampening insert and a nylon inserted locknut. For copper and steel tubing use B-Line BVT series Vibraclamps, for pipe sizes use BVP series.

B. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers as required.

C. For base mounted equipment use vibration pads, molded neoprene mounts, or spring mounts as required.

D. Vibration isolation products as manufactured by B-Line, Vibratrol systems.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed. Hanger rods shall be galvanized or painted in exposed area.

B. Shields shall be 180o galvanized sheet metal, 12” minimum length, 18 gauge minimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe, B-Line B3151.

C. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum thickness, sized for insulation thickness.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Hangers not in direct contact with copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, SC3 or have a green epoxy finish, B-Line Duragreen.

B. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90. C. Strut channels shall be electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Duragreen. D. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123. E. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be painted with copper

colored epoxy, B-Line Duracopper or PVC coated.

2.7 FLASHING

A. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft (24.5 kg/sq m) sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft (5 kg/sq m) sheet lead. 3. Caps: Steel, 22 gage (0.8 mm) minimum; 16 gage (1.5 mm) at fire resistant elements.

2.8 PIPE FLASHING SYSTEM FOR ROOF PENETRATIONS



Note: For new roofs or roof under an existing warranty, the roof manufacturer’s and installers requirements override any roof penetration system specified here. The roof manufacturers system or a system approved by the roof manufacturer shall be used. A. Manufacturers: No applicable B. Pipe Flashings: Lead flashing sleeve with stainless steel clamp at top.

2.9 ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturer’s: Miro Industries Model 4-RAH-7 or approved equal. B. Plumbing, natural gas and condensate drain lines. Piping sizes from ½” to 4”: Miro

Industries Model 4-RAH-7 pipe stand with spacers. C. Base and pipe support construction shall be polycarbonate material.

2.10 EQUIPMENT CURBS Fabrication: Welded 18 gage (1.2 mm) galvanized steel shell and base, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer. Minimum of 18 inches in height. 2.11 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for pipes penetrating exterior walls: Innerlynx Model IL-CB or Equal. B. Steel sleeve with water stop hub. C. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm thick) galvanized

steel. D. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet

Floors: Steel pipe. E. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire

Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. F. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel. G. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel. H. Firestopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. I. Sealant: Acrylic rated for fire stopping where applicable.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished covering

and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub or coupling, with 5 feet (1.5 m)

maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.



J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl

spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches (100 mm) thick and extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond supported equipment. Refer to Related Section for Concrete Work.

B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.4 FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches (75 mm) minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch (25 mm) minimum into hub, 8 inches (200 mm) minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm) sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and calk, metal counterflash, and seal. Locate vents 10’ (ten feet) away from outside air intakes or 3’ (three feet) above top of intake.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches (250 mm) clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch (910 x 910 mm) sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

D. Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 18 inches minimum height above roofing

surface. Flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.

F. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; calk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.5 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.

Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch (25 mm) above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe

or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and calk air tight and to meet fire rating of the assembly where exposed to view. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

E. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.6 SCHEDULES

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER HANGER MAX PIPE SPACING SPACING ROD ROOF DIAMETER SUPPORT SPACING Inches (mm) Feet (m) Inches (mm) Feet (m) 1/2 to 1-1/4 6 3/8 (9) 6 (1.8)



(12 to 32) 1-1/2 to 2 6 3/8 (9) 6 (1.8) (38 to 50) 2-1/2 to 3 6 1/2 (13) 6 (1.8) (62 to 75) 4 to 6 6 5/8 (15) 6 (1.8) (100 to 150)

PVC (All Sizes) 3 3/8 (9) ------ END OF SECTION 22 0529


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 22 0553 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe Markers.


A. Specification Section for Painting, Identification painting. B. Specification section for plumbing piping. C. Specification section for ductwork.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.


A. Specification Section for Submittals, Procedures for submittals. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical

identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and

valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Specification Section for Submittals, Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and

installation.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag

numbers. B. Valve Tag Chart.


A. Conform to ASME Standard reference for labeling and identification of piping systems

and accessories. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Type: UV Resistant engraved phenolic placards.



B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters on light contrasting background color.

2.2 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers: 2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters on light contrasting background

color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square. B. Metal Tags:

1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter with smooth edges.

C. Information Tags: 1. Manufacturers: 2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-

1/4 x 5-5/8 inches (83 x 143 mm) with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers:

1. Manufacturers: 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe

covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:

3. Manufacturers: Brady stick-on or snap-on type with flow arrows or equal. 4. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed

markings. D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:

5. Manufacturers: 6. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches (150

mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

2.4 LABELS

A. Manufacturer: B. Description: Laminated mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches (48 x 19 mm), adhesive backed

with printed identification. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for stencil

painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for - Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.



D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. F. Apply stencil painting in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. G. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished

grade, directly above buried pipe. H. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment

devices and all other major mechanical equipment with plastic nameplates. I. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic

nameplates. J. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. K. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. L. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. M. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service,

and flow direction, Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. For outdoor piping, labels shall be UV resistant, but shall otherwise be placed on north (or more shaded) side of pipe where it does not otherwise obstruct visibility.

N. Identify ductwork with plastic tape duct markers. Locate identification every 20 feet (6m) and at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

O. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. A color coded stick on dot can be applied to the ceiling grid channel in lieu of the ceiling tack.



PIPING INSULATION 22 0700 - 1

SECTION 22 0700 - PIPING INSULATION


A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Firestopping.

B. Specification Section for Painting, Painting insulation jacket.

C. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

D. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping, Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

E. Specification Sections for Hydronic Piping, Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate (ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate).

C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.

D. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.

E. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block.

F. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

G. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

H. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.

I. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

J. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.



K. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

L. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation.

M. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation.

N. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation.

O. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.

P. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials

for Thermal Insulation.

Q. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

R. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride

Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).

S. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

T. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

U. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

V. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

W. NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

X. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

Y. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable

workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section

with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and

thickness. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturer: Knauf Pipe Insulation or equal

B. Insulation: ASTM C547, ASTM C 585, NFPA 90A & 90B; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177,0.24 at 75 degrees F ambient temperature (0.035 at

24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume (.02 perms).

C. Insulation: ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F (343 degrees C. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume (.02 perms).



D. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. ASTM C1136, White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film

(ASJ/SSL Jacketing). 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perms.

E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch (300 mm) centers.

F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

1. Manufacturers: Papco CP-10 or CP-11 2. Compatible with ASJ lap tape.

G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: Papco CP-10 or CP-11 2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting.

H. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Manufacturers: Knauf Fiberglass Insert

2. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177,0.24 at 75 degrees F ambient temperature (0.035 at 24

degrees C). 3. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F

I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:

1. Manufacturers: Papco CP-10 or CP-11 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation. 2.2 UNICELLULAR FOAM (Allowed only where scheduled below)

A. Manufacturer: Armstrong Armaflex 2000.

B. Insulation: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified self sealing cellular foam.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM 518; 0.27 at 75 degrees F (0.020 at 24 degrees C). 2. Minimum service temperature: -40 degrees F (-70 degrees C). 3. Maximum service temperature: 220 degrees F (104 degrees C). 4. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D2842; 0.054 percent by volume.



5. Moisture vapor transmission: .1 perm-inches.

i. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 2.4.1 ALUMINUM JACKETING

A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209.

1. Thickness: 0.025 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps. Finish all joints and

seams with weatherproof sealant. Install all lap joints on the bottom of the pipe. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective

liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 thick aluminum. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Specification Sections for Coordination and Meeting, Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature (including domestic water, condensate drains, and roof drains and overflows): Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:

1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-

sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and

thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers.



F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F insulate flanges and unions at

equipment.

H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:

1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as

adjoining pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers.

I. Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and

contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Sections for Fire Separations.

K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces. Finish with PVC

jacket and fitting covers up to 6’ – 6” above finished floor.

L. Pipe exposed to outdoors shall be finished with aluminum jacketing with seams on the underside for piping.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing Systems:

1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: (Unicellular foam not allowed) 1) Thickness: 1 inch for pipe sizes thru 1-1/2”. 2) Thickness: 2 inch for pipe sizes over 1-1/2”. 2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation:



a. Glass Fiber Insulation: (Unicellular foam not allowed) 1) Thickness: 1 inch for pipe sizes thru 1-1/2”. 2) Thickness: 2 inch for pipe sizes over 1-1/2”.

3. Domestic Cold Water:

a. Glass Fiber or Unicellular foam Insulation with vapor barrier:

1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.

2) Thickness: 1/2 inch for all cold water piping.

4. Roof Drains (and overflows): a. Glass Fiber Insulation with vapor barrier: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.

2) Thickness: 1/2 inch (25 mm).

B. Heating Systems: 1. Heating Water Supply and Return: (Field Installed) a. Glass Fiber Insulation: (Unicellular foam not allowed) 1) Thickness: 1 inch for pipe sizes thru 1-1/2”. 2) Thickness: 2 inch for pipe sizes over 1-1/2”.

2. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils (interior):

a. Glass Fiber Insulation or Cellular Foam with vapor barrier: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.

2) Thickness: 3/4 inch (25 mm).



PLUMBING PIPING 22 1000 - 1

SECTION 22 1000 - PLUMBING PIPING


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.

B. Sanitary sewer.

C. Domestic water.

D. Condensate drains.

E. Natural Gas.

F. DI Water

G. Compressed Air

H. Lab Vacuum


A. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

B. Specification Section for Piping Insulation.

C. See Specifications for Trenching and Backfilling. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. AGA Z21.22 - Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems.

B. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

D. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.

E. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

F. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

G. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

H. ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.



I. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

J. ASME B16.32 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Sovent Drainage Systems.

K. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.

L. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.

M. ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping.

N. ASME SEC IV - Construction of Heating Boilers.

O. ASME SEC IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

P. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings (ASTM A47M - Ferritic Malleable Iron

Castings).

Q. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

R. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

S. ASTM A234/A234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

T. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

U. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.

V. ASTM B43 - Seamless Red Brass Pipe.

W. ASTM B68 - Seamless Copper Tube (ASTM B68M - Seamless Copper Tube).

X. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube (ASTM B75M - Seamless Copper Tube).

Y. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube (ASTM B88M - Seamless Copper Water

Tube).

Z. ASTM B251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube (ASTM B251M - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube).

AA. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field

Service.

BB. ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP).

CC. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

DD. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

EE. ASTM D1785 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.



FF. ASTM D2241 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series).

GG. ASTM D2466 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

HH. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

II. ASTM D2665 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and

Fittings.

JJ. ASTM D2729 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

KK. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

LL. ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

MM. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

NN. ASTM F679 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe

and Fittings.

OO. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

PP. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

QQ. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.

RR. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. Through 12 in. for Water

Distribution.

SS. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.

TT. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

UU. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

VV. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

WW. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves.

XX. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

YY. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

ZZ. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

AAA. MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

BBB. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.



CCC. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

DDD. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

EEE. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

FFF. NCPWB - Procedure Specifications for Pipe Welding.


A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals, Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.

Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Specification Section 01700 for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data, Warranties, Bonds, Procedures for submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, piping, cleanouts.


A. Perform Work in accordance with standards.

B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX.

D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.

E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, water pressure rating.


A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable plumbing code.

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices.


A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.



C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Specification Section 01700 for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40. Cellular core not allowed.

1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM 2564 Solvent Weld.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40. Cellular core not allowed.


2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 (only when installed in non-plenum applications, cellular core not allowed)


2.4 WATER PIPING, BURIED

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, hard drawn Type K. Fittings: ANSI B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.



2.5 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, hard drawn Type K.

1. Fittings: ANSI B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.

2.6 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn or annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.8 CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn:

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.9 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black.

a. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type. b. Joints: welded. c. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil (0.25 mm)

polyethylene tape.

B. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5.

a. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. b. Joints: Fusion welded.

2.10 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type.

b. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded.

Note: Indoor Natural Gas Piping Operating pressure shall not exceed 1 psig unless specifically authorized by the Engineer and the authorities having jurisdiction.

Above Grade Piping within 6” of the ground shall be welded and wrapped.

B. See drawings Pipe Material Schedule for allowed alternates.



2.11 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 3 Inches (80 mm) and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Pipe Size Over 3 Inch (25 mm):

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene

gaskets.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. Clear flow – or Equal.

2.12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. See Specification Section for Supports and Anchors.

2.13 BALL VALVES

A. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, class 150, 400 psi, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. Nibco or Equal.

2.14 PLUG VALVES

A. Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide lever operator with set screw. Nibco or Equal.

2.15 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Construction 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psi CWP, cast or ductile iron body, elastomer coated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug or grooved ends, extended neck, infinite position lever handle with memory stop. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger, and chain-wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet above floor. Nibco or Equal.

2.16 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. MSS SP-80 class 125,bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded ends. Nibco or Equla.

B. 2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-71, class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc

seal and seat, flanged or grooved ends.



2.17 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. Up to 2 inches: class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc Buna N Seals, solder or threaded ends. Nibco or Equla.

B. 2-1/2 inches and larger: iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc Buna

N Seals, wafer style ends. Nibco or Equal. 2.18 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches: MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded and single union ends. Wilkins or Equal.

B. Over 2 Inches:

MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. Wilkins or Equal.

2.19 RELIEF VALVES

A. Pressure Relief:

1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct direct pressure actuated.

B. Temperature and Pressure Relief:

1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,

automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labelled.

2.20 STRAINERS

A. Size 2 inch and Under:

1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Nibco or Equal.

2. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch:

3. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 4. Size 5 inch (125 mm) and Larger: Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern

with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.21 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS

A. General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant:

1. Water based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.



B. General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant:

1. Silicone based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties,

vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

C. DWV Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant:

D. Silicone based, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479 with metal collars.


A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment. Refer to Sections on expansion compensation where applicable.

G. Where waste and vents are exposed at fixtures, pipes shall be chrome plated brass and shall have chrome plated escutcheons where they pass through floors, walls, or ceilings.

H. Install underground gas piping at a minimum depth of 12 inches below grade.

I. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of

insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Sections on insulation.

J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.



K. Establish elevations of buried water and sewer piping outside the building to ensure not less than 6 inches below the frost line and not less than 12 inches below grade.

L. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush

clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

N. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

O. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to sections on painting.

P. Excavate in accordance with Sections for excavation and trenching.

Q. Backfill in accordance with Sections for backfilling.

R. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

T. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof

hood.

U. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.

V. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Seal and provide firestopping as indicated by Sections on penetrations, sealing, and firestopping.

W. No bushings shall be used in conjunction with any gas or water piping. All branch outlet

gas pipes shall be taken from the top or sides of running horizontal lines. 3.4 INSERTS

A. See Specification Section 22 05 29 on Supports and Anchors. 3.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. See Specification Section 22 05 29 for Supports and Anchors. 3.6 APPLICATION

A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

D. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or

vertical risers.



E. Install ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.

G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

H. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.

I. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Specification Section for Quality Control; Tolerances.

B. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to ¼ inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.

C. Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.

3.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer

and sand strainer where indicated. In addition, provide an insulated, lockable backflow preventer enclosure in accordance with code (See ASSE Standard #1060).

C. Provide test of backflow preventer in compliance with code and furnish test results to the

engineer and provide results with O&M Data.

D. Provide new gas service. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 1PSI outside of building shell, pressure shall be regulated to 11 inch wg prior to penetrating building shell.

3.9 TESTING

A. Roof Drains and Waste – All openings shall be tightly sealed. A stand pipe shall be created as necessary and the system shall be tested in its entirety or in segments. Each element in the system shall be tested to a 10 foot water column for 24 hours. Each joint shall be tight and there shall be no loss in water level. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements.

B. Natural Gas – For system pressure less than 1 psi – Test at 10 psi or pressure required by

per local codes, whichever is greater, for 24 hour. For system pressure 1 psi or greater – Test at 100 psi for 24 hours. All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be filled with air and pressurized to 10psi or pressure required by per local codes, whichever is greater, for systems that operate at less than 1psig, and 100psi for systems that operate at 1psig or greater. The



test shall be documented on a chart recorder and held for 24 hours with no loss in pressure. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirement.

C. Domestic Hot and Cold Water – All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be

filled with water and/or air and pressurized to 150 psig. The test shall be documented on a chart recorded and held for 24 hours with no loss in pressure. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirements. Also see disinfection requirements.

D. Fire Protection Service Mains – Hydrostatic test conforming to NFPA 24 and AWWA

C600. All piping and appurtenances subject to system pressure shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 PSI and shall hold such pressure for a period of no less than 2 hours. This test shall be recorded on a chart recorder and filed with the owner’s closeout documents. Submit NFPA 13 Flush out test report.

E. The engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of this procedure so that it may be

witnessed. Regardless of whether the engineer is available to witness the results, the contractor shall document the procedure and the results and provide it to the engineer.



PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 1010 - 1

SECTION 22 1010 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES


A. Cleanouts.

B. Hose bibs.

C. Hydrants.

D. Backflow preventers.

E. Water hammer arrestors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

B. Specification Section for Plumbing Fixtures.

C. Specification Section for Plumbing Equipment.

D. Specification Section for Cast in Place Concrete or Execution requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.

B. ASME A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.

C. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.

D. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.

E. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.

F. ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.

G. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types.

H. PDI G-101 - Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with Appendix of

Sizing and Installation Data.

I. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW



A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and

finishes.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Specification Section 01700 for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data, Warranties and Bonds, Procedures for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow

preventers, water hammer arrestors.

C. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.

D. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.




A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, storage, and protection of products.

B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 See the Plumbing Fixture Schedules. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.



D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.

F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.

G. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of

fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch (20 mm) minimum and minimum 18 inches long.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000 - 1

SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES


A. Water closets.

B. Urinals.

C. Lavatories.

D. Sinks.

E. Service sinks.

F. Electric water coolers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Custom Casework: Preparation of counters for sinks.

B. Specification Section for Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors.

C. Specification Section for Supports and Anchors.

D. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

E. Specification Section for Plumbing Specialties. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers.

B. ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.

C. ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.

D. ASME A112.19.1 - Enamelled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.

E. ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.

F. ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enamelled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.

G. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.




A. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.


A. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.

B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.




A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 See the plumbing fixture schedules on the drawings. Meet all features and design specifications of the models indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Specification Sections 01040, 01200 for Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

D. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of

counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.2 PREPARATION



A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.

B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons.

C. Install components level and plumb.

D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.

E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified, color to match fixture.

F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold

fixture in place. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit use of fixtures.



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 1

SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.

C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

D. Confirmation and reporting of the operation of the HVAC control system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Sections for starting of systems.

B. Specification Sections for controls and the various equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.

B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.

C. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.

D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems.

E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within days after award of Contract.

B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,

adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

C. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required.

D. Prior to commencing work, submit evidence of coordination with the control system and

various devices that will be checked for accuracy, calibration, and functional capability to perform control sequence.

E. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final

copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.



F. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

G. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance

forms or NEBB forms.


A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

B. Maintain copies of document on site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years experience and engaged by contractor to perform this work.

B. Perform Work under supervision of registered Professional Engineer experienced in

performance of this Work and licensed in the State of New Mexico. 1.7 PRE-BALANCING CONFERENCE

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. Coordinate with any phasing requirements for the project. Notify the Controls operators of work requirements that he will need to perform to support the testing, adjusting, and balancing, and controls verification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AGENCIES

A. Agency shall be independent and not legally or formally affiliated with any other entity involved with the project.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions:

1. Systems are started and certified (where required) and operating in a safe and

normal condition.



2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Pumps are rotating correctly. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of

services which prevent system balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

D. Check the drawings for test and balance requirements that are not listed in the specification.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of

design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.



C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus 10 or minus 5 percent of design. 3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of thermometers, sensors, and other control outputs.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing

settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,

closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit

report. 3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Systems Concept – In the fan coil scheme, any given unit shown shall be balanced with “normal” fans on. Normal means the fresh air system, the central toilet exhaust fans (not the various single toilet exhaust fans), and all fan coils in a given area should be on, and the doors should be closed. From there system flows and pressures are expected to fluctuate as fans go off and doors are open.

B. Note that certain systems are installed in areas with gypsum board ceilings, which will

make balancing devices inaccessible. The balancer shall perform a preliminary balance of these systems prior to the installation of the ceilings in order to get a preliminary (conservative) setting on the volume dampers. At final balancing, the airflows shall be set using the opposed blade dampers.

C. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return,

and exhaust air quantities. Verify and report on the accuracy and calibration of control related items associated with the air systems.

D. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional

area of duct. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration flow measuring devices in the control system.

E. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

F. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable

drafts and noise. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of space temperature sensors.

G. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do

not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.



H. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes

required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of the control devices such as current transformers, differential pressure switches, VFDs, etc.

I. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet

or inlet.

J. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of control devices such as differential pressure switches.

K. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for

design conditions. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of control limits associated with these devices.

L. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to

check leakage. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of control related temperature sensors.

M. It is generally the intent that air systems are set to create a slight positive pressure in the

facility. In the absence of any other criteria, the contractor shall set the supply air system to provide approximately 10% more air than the combination of return and exhaust air respective to each system. Any questions regarding this criteria should be brought to the engineer’s attention prior to commencing any work.

3.7 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Systems Concept – In the fan coil scheme, approximately 30% of the control valves have been specified to be 2-way, with the remaining valves being 3-way. It is expected that the 2-way valves should be closed in order to balance the 3-way valves. The 2-way can then be balanced individually. From there the systems flows and pressures will be expected to fluctuating as the 2-ways cycle.

B. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. Verify and report on the

accuracy and calibration of control related items associated with the water systems.

C. Use calibrated fittings and pressure gages to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. Verify and report on the accuracy and calibration of system sensors, thermometers and gauges.

D. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer

elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.

E. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.

Verify and report on the accuracy and calibration of the control valves with respect to their ability to control flow throughout the stroke range.



F. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

G. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system

parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

3.8 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing HVAC Pumps Air Coils Fans Air Filters Air Inlets and Outlets

B. Report Forms

1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and

C. Balancing Agency

a. Project name b. Project location c. Project Architect d. Project Engineer e. Project Contractor f. Project altitude g. Report date 1. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence

d. Summary of out door and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization

e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 2. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range



f. Calibration date 3. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame c. HP/BHP

d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 4. Pump Data: a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer c. Size/model d. Impeller e. Service f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP h. Discharge pressure i. Suction pressure j. Total operating head pressure k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures l. Shut off, total head pressure

5. Cooling Coil Data:

a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual j. Water flow, design and actual k. Water pressure drop, design and actual l. Entering water temperature, design and actual m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual o. Air pressure drop, design and actual 6. Heating Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer



e. Air flow, design and actual f. Water flow, design and actual g. Water pressure drop, design and actual h. Entering water temperature, design and actual i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual j. Entering air temperature, design and actual k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual l. Air pressure drop, design and actual 7. Air Moving Equipment a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual

i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure k. Discharge pressure l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore m. Number of Belts/Make/Size n. Fan RPM 8. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design airflow c. Actual airflow d. Design return airflow e. Actual return air -flow f. Design outside airflow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Out side air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature l. Design outside/return air ratio m. Actual outside/return air ratio 9. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual

f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore



j. Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM 10. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air -flow f. Test velocity g. Test airflow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor 11. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design airflow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air -flow j. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION 23 0593


DUCTWORK INSULATION 23 0700 - 1

SECTION 23 0700 - DUCTWORK INSULATION


A. Ductwork insulation.

B. Insulation Jackets. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Roofing, Finishing outdoor insulation jacket.

B. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

C. Specification Section for Ductwork.

D. Specification Section for Roofing, Installation and finishing of outdoor insulation jacket under roofing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (ASTM B209M – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate).

B. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

C. ASTM C553 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

D. ASTM C612- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation.

E. ASTM C921- Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.

F. ASTM C1071 – Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass

Fiber, Duct Lining Material).

G. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

H. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

I. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a

Radiant Heat Energy Source.



J. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

K. NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

L. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

M. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

N. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals, Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures, which ensure acceptable

workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section

with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255.


A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Transport, storage and protection of products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's

identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE (DUCT WRAP)

A. Manufacturer: Knauf Duct Wrap or Equal.

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

1. R-Factor @ 75°F mean temperature as rated installed at 25% compression. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with vapor barrier tape pressure sensitive foil type tape.

D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:

1. Manufacturers: PAPCO CP-10 or CP-11. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color, weatherproof.

E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage (1.5 mm). 2.2 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturer: Knauf Rigid Fiber Glass Board or Equal.

B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.

1. R-Factor @ 75°F mean temperature as rated installed at 25% compression. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees f (121 degrees C).

3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch (0.081 mm) vinyl.

D. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:

1. Manufacturers: PAPCO, CP-10 or CP-11.



2. Cloth: Untreated: 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight, glass fabric.

3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. 2.3 JACKETS

A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209).

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick

aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Specification Sections for Coordination and Meetings, Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

C. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for Quality Control, Manufacturers instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints. 5. For rectangular duct over 18” wide, the duct wrap shall also be secured to the

bottom of the duct using mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.



D. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends

of insulation.

E. Exterior Applications: Provide rigid insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with Aluminum jacket.

F. Ductwrap Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical

fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.

4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barriers

adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow

operation without disturbing wrapping. 3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Outside Air Intake Ducts:

1. Duct wrap with Vapor Barrier – 2” foil faced fiberglass ductwrap, type 100

B. Supply Ducts and Return Ducts:

1. Duct wrap with Vapor Barrier – 2” foil faced fiberglass ductwrap, type 100

C. Exterior Ductwork

1. Rigid fiberglass insulation – 2” with aluminum jacketing. R-8



AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL & FACILITIES MANAGEMENT 230900 - 1

SECTION 23 0900 – AUTOMATIC THEMPERATURE CONTROL AND FACILITES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish a totally native BACnet-based system, including an operator’s workstation using Microsoft Windows as the operating system and shall be based on a distributed control system in accordance with this specification. The operator’s workstation, all building controllers, application controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using the protocols and network standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135–2001, BACnet. In other words, all workstations and controllers, including unitary controllers, shall be native BACnet devices. No gateways shall be used for communication to controllers installed under this section. Gateways may be used for communication to existing systems or to systems installed under other sections.

B. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system’s functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for Windows-based control software and every controller in system, including unitary controllers.

C. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software configuration from project design data.

D. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases, graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and bid documents.

E. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network cables needed, and all associated hardware.

F. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application controllers, and input/output devices.

G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator’s terminals and peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section.

H. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor name of every item supplied.

I. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system installation, startup, and commissioning.

J. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein.

K. Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system.

L. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuators. No used components shall be used as any part or piece of installed system.


A. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions shall be



provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment, including all unitary equipment such as gas furnaces, AC condensing units, etc. and exhaust fans using native BACnet-compliant components. Non-BACnet-compliant or proprietary equipment or systems (including gateways) shall not be acceptable and are specifically prohibited.

B. Operator’s workstation software shall be Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or XP Professional as the computer operating system. The Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) application program shall be written to communicate specifically utilizing BACnet protocols. Software functions delivered on this project shall include password protection, scheduling (including optimum start), alarming, logging of historical data, full graphics including animation, after-hours billing program, demand limiting, full suite of field engineering tools including graphical programming and applications. Systems using operating systems other than that described above are strictly prohibited. All software required to program application specific controllers and all field level devices and controllers will be left with the owner. All software passwords required to program and make future changes to the system will also become the property of the owner. All software required to make any program changes anywhere in the system along with scheduling,and trending applications will be left with the owner. All software passwords required to program and make future changes to schedules, trends and related program changes will also become the property of the owner. All software required for all field engineering tools including graphical programming and applications will be left with the owner. All software passwords required to program and make future changes to field engineering tools including graphical programming and applications will be left with the owner.

C. Building controllers shall include complete energy management software, including scheduling building control strategies with optimum start and logging routines. All energy management software and firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall not be dependent on the operator’s terminal. Operator’s terminal software is to be used for access to field-based energy management functions only. Provide zone-by-zone direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, runtime accumulation, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage. E. All application controllers for every air handler, rooftop equipment, and any other piece of controlled equipment shall be fully programmable. Application controllers shall be mounted next to controlled equipment and communicate with building controller via BACnet LAN.

D. Room sensors shall be provided with digital readout that allow the user to view room temperature, view outside air temperature, adjust the room setpoint within preset limits and set desired override time. User shall also be able to start and stop unit from the digital sensor. Include all necessary wiring and firmware such that room sensor includes field service mode. Field service mode shall allow technician to balance air handler zones and access any parameter in zone controller.

1.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. The base bid shall be the BACtalk system from Alerton. Other manufacturers may bid based upon meeting all requirements of the specification and receiving approval from the engineer 10 days prior to bid. A paragraph-by-paragraph comparison of based bid specified system versus alternative system along with three references of similar projects (include project name, contact, phone number, location, consultant, value of contract, and a brief description of the control system and how it operates) shall be submitted 15 days prior to bid for review process. If approved, other manufacturer's bids shall be shown as an addition or deduction on the bid form.



B. Approved Manufactures:

1 Alerton BACtalk installed by Automated Control Systems, Inc. 505-881-7070


A. The BAS system shall be designed and installed, commissioned and serviced by manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have an in-place support facility within 2 hours response time of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed installing contractors are not acceptable. The manufacturer shall provide full time, on site, experienced project manager for this work, responsible for direct supervision of the design, installation, start up and commissioning of the BAS system. The Bidder shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing, installation and maintenance of BAS systems and shall have demonstrated technical expertise and experience in the manufacture, installation and maintenance of BAS systems similar in size and complexity to this project. Bidders shall provide a list of at least 10 projects, similar in size and scope to this project completed within the past 3 years.

B. The BAS system manufacturer must have a Dealer or Customer Support call-in Center located at the corporate headquarters or corporate manufacturing facilities. The Customer Support call-in Center will be staffed by fully trained and certified technicians.

C. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements.

D. All BAS peer-to-peer network controllers, central system controllers and local user displays shall be UL Listed under Standard UL 916, category PAZX.

E. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled.

F. Control system shall be engineered, programmed and supported completely by representative’s local office that must be within 100 miles of project site.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of supplier's proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof , shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet.

3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), including local amendments.

4. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment. Canada and the US.

5. National Electrical Code (NEC).

6. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A



7. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark)

8. UL-864 UUKL listing for Smoke Controls for any equipment used in smoke control sequences

B. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of contract date.

C. Except as otherwise indicated the system supplier shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals by the governing authorities.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Drawings

1. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill of materials for approval.

2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11” x 17” (ANSI B).

3. Eight complete sets (copies) of submittal drawings shall be provided.

4. Drawings shall be available on CD-ROM.

B. System Documentation

Include the following in submittal package:

1. System configuration diagrams in simplified block format.

2. All input/output object listings and an alarm point summary listing.

3. Electrical drawings that show all system internal and external connection points, terminal block layouts, and terminal identification.

4. Complete bill of materials, valve schedule and damper schedule.

5. Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and operation of all purchased items.

6. Overall system operation and maintenance instructions—including preventive maintenance and troubleshooting instructions.

7. For all system elements—operator’s workstation(s), building controller(s), application controllers, routers, and repeaters,—provide BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001.

8. Provide complete description and documentation of any proprietary (non-BACnet) services and/or objects used in the system.

9. A list of all functions available and a sample of function block programming that shall be part of delivered system.



C. Project Management

1. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time markings and details for hardware items and software development phases. Schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging, and commissioning.

D. BACnet Device Object Naming Conventions

1. The BAS manufacturer’s representative shall submit a BACnet Device Object Naming Convention Plan (DONCP) to the owner and consulting engineer during the submittal process. The plan must be approved by the owner and consulting engineer prior to implementation. It is the responsibility of the BAS contractor to coordinate the DONCP with the owner and consulting engineer.

2. The DONCP shall be designed to eliminate any confusion between individual points in a facility/campus wide EMCS system. It will also be designed to allow for future expansion and consistency. Each device on a BACnet internetwork (including other manufacturer’s devices) must have a unique device instance. This is a major consideration when adding to an existing system or interconnecting networks. Thorough and accessible site documentation is critical.

3. A consistent object (point) naming convention shall be used to facilitate familiarity and operational ease across an eventual large campus or inventory of facilities. The following section is designed as recommendations only. It is the responsibility of the BAS contractor to coordinate the DONCP with the owner and consulting engineer

4. BACnet requires that all devices have a Device object name that is unique throughout the entire internetwork. To comply with this requirement all BACnet devices should be configured with a Device Object Name that is based on the naming conventions described in this section. This includes all physical devices aswell as any logical BACnet devices that are represented by gateways. The vendor shall coordinate with the owner’s staff to ensure that the correct names are used. Device Object Name properties shall support strings of at least 50 characters in length.

5. Every system device has addresses by which any other BACnet device can identify it and route information to and from it. Although there are a number of addresses to consider, the scheme is fairly straightforward. It can become complicated, however, if addresses have not been documented adequately or there is no logical addressing scheme.

6. When you set up and plan a BACnet network or add to an existing network, considering and documenting your addressing scheme is of the utmost importance. Adopt a hierarchical and uniform addressing scheme for device instances to help you quickly identify the function and location of different devices when troubleshooting. Additionally, it’s very important to document every element of your addressing scheme and update the site documentation with any changes.

7. This section first covers the important addressing issues with respect to BACnet

8. LANs and it gives a practical application you can use to check your understanding.

9. BACnet addressing



a. Three types of addresses are important in any BACnet system: network numbers,

b. media access control (MAC) addresses, and device instances. Each BACnet device has these addresses associated with it. Though all three can be thought of as addresses, they are all very different both in how they function and how they are assigned.

10. Network numbers: Identifies the network to which a BACnet device belongs. Every network on a BACnet LAN has a unique numerical identifier—a network number. This network number is used by BACnet devices only; it does not rely on nor does it affect any other network protocols. LANs connected by a router must have different network numbers. No interconnected BACnet networks can have the same network number. Network number range is 1–65534, for a maximum of 65534 interconnected BACnet networks.

11. IMPORTANT: BACnet reserves network numbers 0 and 65,535 for special purposes. Don’t use network 0 or 65,535.

12. MAC addresses: Hardware-oriented. The MAC address uniquely identifies a device on its particular network. Each network type—Ethernet and MS/TP—has its own MAC addressing scheme. A device that exists on two or more networks will have a MAC address for each one. Devices can have the same MAC addresses as long as they are on networks with different network numbers.

13. Note: It’s helpful to think of the MAC address as a house number and the network number as the street number. Two houses can have the same house number (MAC address) as long as they are on different streets (networks).

14. Ethernet devices - For Ethernet LANs, the IEEE assigns a certain range of MAC addresses to manufacturers of Ethernet products. manufacturer then assigns a unique MAC address to each of its Ethernet devices.

15. MS/TP devices - For devices on an MS/TP LAN, you assign the MAC address for each controller. For BACtalk VLCs, these are assigned with DIP switches. Devices on an MS/TP LAN are designated as either masters or slaves, which affects how they can be addressed. This is a requirement of the BACnet specification. All BACtalk MS/TP devices are masters.

16. IMPORTANT BACnet reserves MS/TP MAC address 255 for special purposes. Don’t use MS/TP MAC 255.

17. Device instances Software-oriented. The device instance identifies the device to the BACnet software and is the address most often encountered. The device instance is a shortcut to having to specify a MAC address and network number each time an operation is performed. Device instances range from 0–4194302.

18. Note BACnet reserves device instance 4194303 for special purposes. Don’t use device instance 4194303.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period of one



year from completion of system acceptance.

B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours Monday through Friday, 48 hours on Saturday and Sunday.

C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.

1.8 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Refer to Division 0 and Division 1 for related contractual requirements.

B. Refer to Section 220000 for General Mechanical Provisions

C. Refer to Divisions 24, 25, 26 for General Electrical Provisions

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATOR’S WORKSTATION

A. General structure of workstation interaction shall be a standard client/server relationship. Server shall be used to archive data and store system database. Clients shall access server for all archived data. Each client shall include flexibility to access graphics from server or local drive. Server shall support a minimum of 50 clients simultaneously.

B. BACnet Conformance

1. Operator’s workstation shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP) and Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native BACnet device. Operator’s terminal shall comply with the requirements of a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

a. Clock Functional Group

b. Event Response Functional Group

c. Time Master Functional Group

d. Device Communications

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

3. Standard BACnet object types accessed by the workstation shall include as a minimum: Analog Value, Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Calendar, Device, Event Enrollment, File, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.



4. The Operator Workstation shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus area networks (CANs). Workstation shall support Foreign Device Registration to allow temporary workstation connection to IP network.

C. Displays

1. Operator’s workstation shall display all data associated with project as called out on drawings and/or object type list supplied. Graphic files shall be created using digital, full color photographs of system installation, AutoCAD or Visio drawing files of field installation drawings and wiring diagrams from as-built drawings. Operator’s workstation shall display all data using three-dimensional graphic representations of all mechanical equipment. System shall be capable of displaying graphic file, text, and dynamic object data together on each display and shall include animation. Information shall be labeled with descriptors and shall be shown with the appropriate engineering units. All information on any display shall be dynamically updated without any action by the user. Workstation shall allow user to change all field-resident EMCS functions associated with the project, such as setpoints, weekly schedules, exception schedules, etc. from any screen no matter if that screen shows all text or a complete graphic display. This shall be done without any reference to object addresses or other numeric/mnemonic indications.

2. All displays and programming shall be generated and customized by the local EMCS supplier and installer. Systems requiring factory development of graphics or programming of DDC logic are specifically prohibited.

3. Binary objects shall be displayed as ACTIVE/INACTIVE/NULL or with customized text. Text shall be justified left, right or center as selected by the user. Also, allow binary objects to be displayed as individual change-of-state graphic objects on the display screen such that they overlay the system graphic. Each binary object displayed in this manner shall be assigned up to three graphic files for display when the point is ON, OFF or in alarm. For binary outputs, toggle the object’s commanded status when the graphic item is selected with the system mouse. Similarly, allow the workstation operator to toggle the binary object’s status by selecting with the mouse a graphic of a switch or light, for example, which then displays a different graphic (such as an “ON” switch or lighted lamp). Additionally, allow binary objects to be displayed as an animated graphic. Animated graphic objects shall be displayed as a sequence of multiple graphics to simulate motion. For example: when a pump is in the OFF condition, display a stationary graphic of the pump. When the operator selects the pump graphic with the mouse, the represented object’s status is toggled and the graphic of the pump’s impeller rotates in a time-based animation. The operator shall be able to click on an animated graphical object or switch it from the OFF position to ON, or ON to OFF. Allow operator to change graphic file assignment and also create new and original graphics online. System shall be supplied with a library of standard graphics, which may be used unaltered or modified by the operator. Systems that do not allow customization or creation of new graphic objects by the operator (or with third-party software) shall not be allowed.

4. Analog objects shall be displayed with operator modifiable units. Analog input objects may also be displayed as individual graphic items on the display screen as an overlay to the system graphic. Each analog input object may be assigned a minimum of five graphic files, each with high/low limits for automatic selection and display of these



graphics. As an example, a graphic representation of a thermometer would rise and fall in response to either the room temperature or its deviation from the controlling setpoint. Analog output objects, when selected with the mouse, shall be displayed as a prompted dialog (text only) box. Selection for display type shall be individual for each object. Analog object values may be changed by selecting either the “increase” or “decrease” arrow in the analog object spinner box without using the keypad. Pressing the button on the right side of the analog object spinner box allows direct entry of an analog value and accesses various menus where the analog value may be used, such as trendlogs.

5. Analog objects may also be assigned to an area of a system graphic, where the color of the defined area changes based on the analog object’s value. For example, an area of a floor-plan graphic served by a single control zone would change color with respect to the temperature of the zone or its deviation from setpoint. All editing and area assignment shall be created or modified online using simple icon tools.

6. A customized menu label (push-button) shall be used for display selection. Menu items on a display shall allow penetration to lower level displays or additional menus. Dynamic point information and menu label push buttons may be mixed on the same display to allow sub-displays to exist for each item. Each display may be protected from viewing unless operator has appropriate security level. A security level may be assigned to each display and system object. The menu label shall not appear on the graphic if the operator does not have the appropriate security level.

7. A mouse shall be used to move the pointer arrow to the desired item for selection of new display or to allow the operator to make changes to object data.

D. Password Protection

1. Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged on. Access shall be limited to operator’s assigned functions when user is logged on. This includes displays as outlined above.

2. Each operator’s terminal shall provide security for 200 users minimum. Each user shall have an individual User ID, User Name and Password. Entries are alphanumeric characters only and are case sensitive (except for User ID). User ID shall be 0–8 characters, User Name shall be 0–29 characters, and Password shall be 4–8 characters long. Each system user shall be allowed individual assignment of only those control functions and menu items to which that user requires access. All passwords, user names, and access assignments shall be adjustable online at the operator’s terminal. Each user shall also have a set security level, which defines access to displays and individual objects the user may control. System shall include 10 separate and distinct security levels for assignment to users.

3. System shall include an Auto Logout Feature that shall automatically logout user when there has been no keyboard or mouse activity for a set period of time. Time period shall be adjustable by system administrator. Auto Logout may be enabled and disabled by system administrator. Operator terminal shall display message on screen that user is logged out after Auto Logout occurs.

E. Operator Activity Log

1. Operator Activity Log shall be included with system that tracks all operator changes and



activities. System shall track what is changed in the system, who performed this change, date and time of system activity and value of the change before and after operator activity. Operator shall be able to display all activity, sort the changes by user and also by operation.

2. Log shall be gathered and archived to hard drive on operator workstation as needed. Operator shall be able to export data for display and sorting in a spreadsheet.

3. Any displayed data, that is changeable by the operator, may be selected using the right mouse button and the operator activity log shall then be selectable on the screen. Selection of the operator activity log using this method shall show all operator changes of just that displayed data.

F. Scheduling

1. Operator’s workstation shall show all information in easy-to-read daily format including calendar of this month and next. All schedules shall show actual ON/OFF times for day based on scheduling priority. Priority for scheduling shall be events, holidays and daily with events being the highest.

2. Holiday and special event schedules shall display data in calendar format. Operator shall be able to schedule holidays and special events directly from these calendars.

3. Operator shall be able to change all information for a given weekly or exception schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access.

4. System shall include a Schedule Wizard for set up of schedules. Wizard shall walk user through all steps necessary for schedule generation. Wizard shall have its own pull-down selection for startup or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic and then selecting Schedule.

5. Scheduling shall include optimum start based on outside air temperature, current heating/cooling setpoints, indoor temperature and history of previous starts. Each and every individual zone shall have optimum start time independently calculated based on all parameters listed. User shall input schedules to set time that occupied setpoint is to be attained. Optimum start feature shall calculate the startup time needed to match zone temperature to setpoint. User shall be able to set a limit for the maximum startup time allowed.

G. Alarm Indication and Handling.

1. Operator’s workstation shall provide audible, visual, and printed means of alarm indication. The alarm dialog box shall always become the top dialog box regardless of the application(s),currently running. Printout of alarms shall be sent to the assigned terminal and port.

2. System shall provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard disk of the system operator’s terminal. Each entry shall include a description of the event-initiating object generating the alarm. Description shall be an alarm message of at least 256 characters in length. Entry shall include time and date of alarm occurrence, time and date of object state return to normal, time and date of alarm acknowledgment and identification of operator acknowledging alarm .



3. Alarm messages shall be in user-definable text (English or other specified language) and shall be entered either at the operator’s terminal or via remote communication.

4. System shall include an Alarm Wizard for set up of alarms. Wizard shall walk user through all steps necessary for alarm generation. Wizard shall have its own pull-down selection for startup or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic and then selecting alarm setup.

H. Trendlog Information

1. System server shall periodically gather historically recorded data stored in the building controllers and archive the information Archived files shall be appended with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated. Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed, unless limited file size is specified. Samples may be viewed at the operator’s workstation. Operator shall be able to scroll through all trended data. All trendlog information shall be displayed in standard engineering units.

2. Software shall be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object data. Software shall be capable of creating two-axis (x,y) graphs that display up to ten object types at the same time in different colors. Graphs shall show object values relative to time.

3. Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information. This includes the information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. All input, output, and value object types in the system may be logged. All operations shall be password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from any and all graphics on which object is displayed.

4. System shall include a trend Wizard for setup of logs. Wizard shall walk user through all necessary steps. Wizard shall have its own pull-down selection for startup, or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic, and then selecting Trendlogs from the displayed menu.

I. Energy Log Information

1. System server shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the field equipment and archive the information. Archive files shall be appended with new data, allowing data to be accumulated. Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed unless limited file size is specified. Display all energy log information in standard engineering units.

2. All data shall be stored in data base file format for direct use by third-party programs. Operation of system shall stay completely online during all graphing operations.

3. Operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This includes the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be logged. All meters monitored by the system may be logged. System shall support using flow and temperature sensors for BTU monitoring.

4. System shall display archived data in tabular format form for both consumption and peak values. Data shall be shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly formats. In each format the user shall be able to select a specific period of data to view.



J. Demand Limiting

1. System shall include demand limiting program that includes two types of load shedding. One type of load shedding shall shed/restore equipment in binary fashion based on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. The other type of shedding shall adjust operator selected control setpoints in an analog fashion based on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. Shedding may be implemented independently on each and every zone or piece of equipment connected to system.

2. Binary shedding shall include minimum of 5 priority levels of equipment shedding. All loads in a given priority level shall be shed before any loads in a higher priority level are shed. Load shedding within a given priority level shall include two methods. In one the loads shall be shed/restored in a “first off-first on” mode and in the other the loads are just shed/restored in a linear fashion.

3. Analog shed program shall generate a ramp that is independently used by each individual zone or individual control algorithm to raise the appropriate cooling setting and lower appropriate heating setting to reduce energy usage.

4. Status of each and every load shed program shall be capable of being displayed on every operator terminal connected to system. Status of each load assigned to an individual shed program shall be displayed along with English description of each load.

K. Tenant Activity

1. System shall include program that monitors after-hours overrides by tenants, logs that data and generates a bill based on usage and rate charged for each tenant space. Tenant Activity program shall be able to assign multiple zones, from a list of every zone connected to system, to a particular tenant. Every zone is monitored for after-hour override usage and that data logged in server. Operator may then generate a bill based on the usage for each tenant and the rate charged for any overtime use.

2. Configuration shall include entry of the following information for use in logging and billing.

a. Tenants contact name and address

b. One or multiple tenant zones that make up a total tenant space including a separate billing rate for each separate zone.

c. Minimum and maximum values an event duration and event limit

d. Property management information

e. Overall billing rate

f. Seasonal adjustments or surcharge to billing rate

g. Billing notification type such including, but not limited to printer, file and email

h. Billing form template

3. Logging shall include recording the following information for each and every tenant event.



a. Zone description

b. Time the event begins

c. Total override time

d. Limits shall be applied to override time.

4. A tenant bill shall be generated for a specific period using all the entered configuration data and the logged data. User with appropriate security level shall be able to view and override billing information. User shall be able to select a billing period to look to view and be able to delete events from billing and be able to edit a selected tenant activity event’s override time.

L. Configuration/Setup

1. Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This shall include, but not be limited to, system time, day of the week, date of daylight savings set forward/set back, printer termination, port addresses, modem port and speed, etc. Items shall be modified using understandable terminology with simple mouse/cursor key movements.

M. Field Engineering Tools

1. Operator’s workstation software shall include field-engineering tools for programming all controllers supplied. All controllers shall be programmed using graphical tools that allow the user to connect function blocks on screen that provide sequencing of all control logic. Function blocks shall be represented by graphical displays that are easily identified and distinct from other types of blocks. Graphical programming that uses simple rectangles and squares is not acceptable.

2. User shall be able to pick graphical function block from menu and place on screen. Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be downloaded to controller without any reentry of data.

3. Programming tools shall include a real time operation mode. Function blocks shall display real time data and be animated to show status of data inputs and outputs when in real time operation. Animation shall show change of status on logic devices and countdown of timer devices in graphical format.

4. Field engineering tools shall also include a database manager of applications that include logic files for controllers and associated graphics. Operator shall be able to select unit type, input/output configuration and other items that define unit to be controlled. Supply minimum of 250 applications as part of workstation software.

5. Field engineering tool shall include Device Manager for automatic detection of devices connected anywhere on the BACnet network by scanning of the entire network. This function shall display device instance, network identification, model number and description of connected devices. It shall record and display software file loaded into each controller. A copy of each file shall be stored on the computers hard drive. If needed, this file shall be downloaded to the appropriate controller by selection using the mouse.



6. System shall include backup/restore function that will back up entire system to selected medium and then restore system from that media.

N. Workstation Hardware

1. Provide operator’s workstation(s) at location(s) noted on the plans.

2. Workstation/Server Computer Minimum Requirements

a. Pentium IV, 2.6 Ghz or better

b. 1 GB RAM or better

c. 180GB hard disk or better

d. High-performance graphics adapter

e. Ethernet 10/100 network interface card

f. Keyboard, monitor, mouse, CD-ROM

g. Windows XP Professional

h. Modem, 56Kb Minimum

i. Color Printer (Inkjet, Color Dye or Laser)

O. Software

1. At the conclusion of project, contractor shall leave with owner a CD ROM that includes the complete software operation system and project graphics, setpoints, system parameters, etc. This backup shall allow the owner to completely restore the system in the case of a computer malfunction.

2.2 WEB INTERFACE

A. General

1. BAS supplier shall provide web-based access to the system as part of standard installation. User shall be able to access all displays of real-time data that are part of the BAS via a standard Web browser. Web browser shall tie into the network via owner-supplied Ethernet network connection. Web-page host shall be a separate device that resides on the BAS BACnet network, but is not the BAS server for the control system. BAS server must be a separate computer from the Web-page host device to ensure data and system integrity. The web-page software shall not require a per user licensing fee or annual fees. The web-page host must be able to support on average 50 simultaneous users with the ability to expand the system to accommodate an unlimited number of users.

B. Browser Technology

1. Browser shall be standard version of Microsoft IE. No special vendor-supplied software shall be needed on computers running browser. All displays shall be viewable and the Web-page host shall directly access real-time data from the BAS BACnet network. Data



shall be displayed in real time and update automatically without user interaction. User shall be able to change data on displays if logged in with the appropriate user name and password.

C. Communications

1. Web-page host shall include two Ethernet network connections. One network connection shall be dedicated to BAS BACnet network and shall be used to gather real-time data from all the BACnet devices that form the BAS. This network shall communicate via BACnet, allowing the Web-page host to gather data directly from units on the local LAN or from other projects connected over a WAN. This network shall also provide the connection to the BAS server for Web page generation.

2. The second Ethernet connection shall provide the physical connection to the Internet or an IP-based WAN. It shall be the port that is used for the browser to receive Web pages and data from the Web-page host. The Web-page host shall act as a physical barrier between the BAS network and the WAN or Internet connection that allows the browser to receive web pages and data. The two separate network connections provide for a physical barrier to prevent raw BACnet traffic being exposed on the IP network.

3. The Web-page host shall provide for complete isolation of the IP and BACnet networks by not routing networking packets between the two networks.

4. BAS BACnet Ethernet network shall be provided and installed by the BAS supplier. Owner shall provide and incur any monthly charges of WAN/Internet connection.

D. Display of Data

1. Web page graphics shown on browser shall be replicas of the BAS displays. User shall need no additional training to understand information presented on Web pages when compared to what is shown on BAS displays. Web page displays shall include animation just as BAS displays. Fans shall turn, pilot lights shall blink, coils shall change colors, and so on.

2. Real-time data shall be shown on all browser Web pages. This data must be directly gathered via the BACnet network and automatically updated on browser Web page displays without any user action. Data on the browser shall automatically refresh as changes are detected without re-drawing the complete display.

3. It shall be possible for user from browser Web page to change data if the user is logged on with the appropriate password. Clicking on a button or typing in a new value shall change digital data. Using pull-down menus or typing in a new value shall change analog data.

4. Data displays shall be navigated using pushbuttons on the displays that are simply clicked on with the mouse to select a new display. Alternatively, the standard back and forward buttons of the browser can be used for display navigation.

E. Time Schedule Adjustment

1. Web access shall allow user to view and edit all schedules in the system. This includes standard, holiday and event schedules as described in BAS specification. Display of



schedules shall show interaction of all schedules on a single display so user sees an overview of how all work together. User shall be able to edit schedules from this display.

2. Display of all 3 schedules must show all ON times for standard, holiday and event

schedules in different colors on a given day. In addition, OFF times for each must also be shown in additional colors. User shall be able to select from standard calendar what days are to be scheduled and same display shall show all points and zones affected. User shall be able to set time for one day and select all days of the week that shall be affected as a recurrence of that same schedule for that given day.

3. Schedule list shall show all schedules currently defined. This list shall include all

standard, holiday and event schedules. In addition, user shall be able to select a list that shows all scheduled points and zones.

F. Logging of Information 1. User shall use standard browser technology to view all trend logs in system. User shall

be able to view logged data in tabular form or graphical format. User shall be able to adjust time interval of logged data viewed and shall be able to adjust y axis of data viewed in graphical format. User shall also be able to down-load data through the web interface to local computer. Data shall be in CSV format.

G. Alarm Handling 1. Web interface shall display alarms as they occur. User shall be able to acknowledge

alarms using browser technology. In addition, user shall be able to view history of alarm occurrence over a user selected time frame. In addition, those alarms may be filtered for viewing per user selected options. A single selection shall display all alarms that have not been acknowledged.

H. Web Page Generation 1. Web pages shall be generated automatically from the BAS displays that reside on the

BAS server. User shall access Web-page host via the network and shall initiate a web page generation utility that automatically takes the BAS displays and turns them into Web pages. The Web pages generated are automatically installed on the Web page host for access via any computer’s standard browser. Any system that requires use of an HTML editor for generation of Web pages shall not be considered.

I. Password Security and Activity Log 1. Access via Web browser shall utilize the same hierarchical security scheme as BAS

system. User shall be asked to log in once the browser makes connection to Web-page host. Once the user logs in, any and all changes that are made shall be tracked by the BAS system. The user shall be able to change only those items that the user has authority to change. A user activity report shall show any and all activity of the users that have logged in to the system regardless of whether those changes were made using a browser or via the BAS workstation.





J. BACnet Communication

1. Web server shall directly communicate to all devices on the BAS network using BACnet

protocol. No intermediate devices shall be necessary for BACnet communication.

2.3 BUILDING CONTROLLER

A. General Requirements

1. Building Controller shall be of modular construction such that various modules may be selected to fit the specific requirements of a given project. Modules shall consist of a power supply module, a BACnet Ethernet-MS/TP module, a BACnet MS/TP only module and a modem module for telephone communication as a minimum. Those projects that require special interfaces may use Modbus modules as needed. However, all Ethernet communications and all controllers including central plant controllers, advanced application controllers and unitary controllers supplied by BMS manufacturer shall utilize the BACnet protocol standard.

2. Modules shall be selected to fit the particular project application. Up to 7 modules shall be powered by a single power supply module. All modules shall be panel mounted on DIN rail for ease of addition and shall be interconnected via simple plug in cable. A module in the middle shall be replacable without removing any other modules.

3. All modules shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the system based on information from any objects in the system regardless if the object is directly monitored by the building controller module or by another controller. The software program implementing these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable. All software tools necessary for programming shall be provided as part of project software. Any systems utilizing factory pre-programmed global strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on-site, via a wide area network or downloaded via remote communications are not acceptable. Changing global strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable.

4. Programming shall be object-oriented using control function blocks, supporting DDC functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values.. All flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. Programming tool shall be supplied and be resident on workstation. The same tool shall be used for all controllers.

5. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real-time as program is executing. This function may be performed via the operator’s workstation or field computer.

6. Controller shall have a memory needed to ensure high performance and data reliability. Battery shall provide power for orderly shutdown of controller and storage of data in nonvolatile flash memory. Battery back up shall maintain real-time clock functions for a minimum of 20 days.

7. Global control algorithms and automated control functions shall execute via 32-bit processor.



8. Schedules

a. Each building controller module shall support a minimum of 80 BACnet Schedule Objects and 80 BACnet Calendar Objects.

b. Building controller modules shall provide normal 7 day scheduling, holiday scheduling and event scheduling.

9. Logging Capabilities

a. Each building controller shall log as minimum 320 values. Any object in the system (real or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the operator’s workstation.

b. Logs may be viewed both on-site or off-site via WAN or remote communication.

c. Building controller shall periodically upload trended data to networked operator’s workstation for long term archiving if desired.

d. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-party spreadsheet or database programs.

10. Alarm Generation

a. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or state either real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object state changes, and various controller communication failures.

b. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted elsewhere.

c. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the operator’s terminal or off-site via remote communications.

d. Controller must be able to handle up to 320 alarm setups stored as BACnet event enrollment objects – system destination and actions individually configurable.

11. Demand Limiting

a. Demand limiting of energy shall be built a built in function that shall be user configurable. Each controller module shall support shedding of up to 200 loads using a minimum of two types of shed programs.

b. Load shedding programs in Building Controller Modules shall operate as defined in section 2.1.J of this specification.

12. Tenant Activity Logging

a. Tenant Activity logging shall be supported by Building Controller Module. Each independent module shall support a minimum of 80 zones.

b. Tenant Activity logging shall functions as defined in section 2.1.K of this specification.



B. Ethernet – MS/TP Module

1. Ethernet – MS/TP Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General Requirements, of this section and the following.

2. All communication with operator workstation and all application controllers shall be via BACnet. Building controller Ethernet – MS/TP module shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 2-way BACnet router. Controller shall route BACnet messages between the high-speed LAN (Ethernet 10/100MHz) and master slave token passing (MS/TP) LAN. Ethernet – MS/TP module shall also route messages from all other Building Controller modules onto the BACnet Ethernet network.

a. MS/TP LAN must be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.

b. The RJ-45 Ethernet connection must accept either 10Base-T or 100Base-TX BACnet over twisted pair cable (UTP).

3. BACnet Conformance

a. Ethernet – MS/TP module shall as a minimum support MS/TP and Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routing functions between all supported LAN types. Global controller shall be a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

i. Clock Functional Group

ii. Files Functional Group

iii. Reinitialize Functional Group

iv. Device Communications Functional Group

v. Event Initiation Functional Group

b. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

c. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value, Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

d. The Building Controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus area networks (CANs) and function as a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD).



C. MS/TP Module

1. MS/TP Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General Requirements, of this section and the following.

2. Building Controller MS/TP module communications shall be via BACnet master slave token passing (MS/TP) LAN to all advanced application and application specific controllers. MS/TP module shall also route messages to Ethernet-MS/TP module for communication over WAN.

a. MS/TP LAN must be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps

b. Configuration shall be via RS-232 connection.

3. BACnet Conformance

a. MS/TP module shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN type. It shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN as a native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routing functions between all supported LAN types. Controller shall be a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

i. Clock Functional Group

ii. Files Functional Group

iii. Reinitialize Functional Group

iv. Device Communications Functional Group

v. Event Initiation Functional Group

b. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.


D. Power Supply Module

1. Power supply module shall power up to 7 Building Controller Modules. Input for power shall accept between 17 and 30 VAC, 47 to 65 Hz.

2. Power supply module shall include rechargeable battery for orderly shutdown of controller modules including storage of all data in flash memory and for continuous operation of real time clocks for minimum of 20 days.



E. Modem Module

1. Provide all functions that will allow remote communications via modem module to off-site locations. Modem module shall integrate directly into modular controller without any special software or hardware. Include one modem module along with all cabling necessary for installation for the system.

2. Provide Windows 2000 software for off-site computer that allows operator to view and change all information associated with system on color graphic displays. Operator shall be able to change all parameters in this section from off-site location including all programming of building controllers and all programmable application controllers including all terminal unit controllers.

3. Building controller shall have capability to call out alarm conditions automatically. If desired, controller may also send encoded message to digital pager. If an alphanumeric pager is in use by the operator, building controller shall be capable of sending a text or numeric string of alarm description. All building controllers connected to the local LAN shall be capable of calling out alarm messages through one or more shared modems connected to one or more of the building controllers on the local LAN.

4. Building controller shall have capability to call a minimum of 20 different phone numbers. Numbers called may be controlled by type of alarm or time schedule.

5. Owner shall provide standard voice-grade phone line for remote communication function.

6. Building controller and internal modem shall be capable of modem-to-modem baud rates of 33.6 Kbps minimum over standard voice-grade phone lines. Lower baud rates shall be selectable for areas where local phone company conditions require them.

F. TUX Module

1. TUX Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General Requirements, of this section and the following.

2. Building Controller TUX module communications shall be via Alerton TUX Trunk to up to 64 Alerton TUX’s. TUX module shall convert TUX data into BACnet objects and create virtual BACnet devices for every TUX connected to the TUX module. TUX module shall also route messages to Ethernet-MS/TP module for BACnet Ethernet communication over WAN.

a. TUX Module shall support TUX communication at 4800 and 9600 baud.

b. Configuration shall be via RS-232 connection.

3. BACnet Translation

a. All TUX data shall be automatically translated into BACnet objects by the TUX module. No configuration by the user shall be necessary. Predefined BACnet objects shall be automatically assigned for each type of TUX controller connected.

b. Every TUX controller shall become a virtual BACnet device for ease of use with the BACnet workstation for configuration and operation.




G. Modbus Module

1. Modbus Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General Requirements, of this section and the following.

2. Building Controller Modbus module communications shall be via one of three types of ports: EIA-485, EIA-422 or RS-232 connection. Modbus module shall convert Modbus data into BACnet objects. Modbus module shall also route messages to Ethernet-MS/TP module for BACnet Ethernet communication over WAN.

a. Modbus Module shall support ASCII or RTU Modbus communication at 9600 or 4800 baud.

b. EIA-422 and EIA-232 connection shall support one connection of Modbus unit.

c. EIA-485 connection shall support connection of up to 247 Modbus units.

d. Configuration shall be via RS-232 connection.

3. BACnet Translation

H. All Modbus data shall be translated into BACnet objects by the Modbus module. All configuration tools shall be supplied to assure data is translated as necessary to the correct format and value.

I. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value, Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

2.4 AIR HANDLER APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Provide one or more native BACnet application controllers for each air handler and provide native BACnet application controllers as needed for air cooled condensing control that adequately cover all objects listed in object list. All controllers shall interface to building controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic program as needed for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable using graphical programming blocks. Programming tool shall be resident on operator workstation and be the same tool as used for the building controller. No auxiliary or non-BACnet controllers shall be used.


1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as



native BACnet devices. Application controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3 and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

a. Files Functional Group

b. Reinitialize Functional Group

c. Device Communications Functional Group

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum—Analog Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File, and Program object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 0–10VDC, 0–5 VDC, 4–20 mA and dry contact signals. Any input on a controller may be either analog or digital with a minimum of 3 inputs that accept pulses. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary and analog outputs on board. Analog outputs shall be switch selectable as either 0–10VDC or 0–20mA. Software shall include scaling features for analog outputs. Application controller shall include 24VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to external sensors.

D. All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller 10 times per second and capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. All calculations shall be completed using floating-point math and system shall support display of all information in floating-point nomenclature at operator’s terminal. Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be programmed using programming tools as described in operator’s terminal section.

E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see section 2.9.B.) Display on intelligent room sensor shall be programmable at application controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at intelligent room sensor.

2.5 TERMINAL UNIT APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Provide one native BACnet application controller for each piece of unitary mechanical equipment that adequately covers all objects listed in object list for unit. All controllers shall interface to building controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic program as needed for complete



control of unit.


1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as a native BACnet device. Application controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3 and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

a. Files Functional Group

b. Reinitialize Functional Group

c. Device Communications Functional Group

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum–Analog Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 0–5 VDC, 4–20 mA, dry contact signals and a minimum of 3 pulse inputs. Any input on controller may be either analog or digital. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor. Controller shall include binary outputs on board with analog outputs as needed.

D. All program sequences shall be stored on board controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller 10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be programmed using same programming tools as building controller and as described in operator workstation section. All programming tools shall be provided and installed as part of system.

E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section 2.9.B.) Display on room sensor shall be programmable at controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at intelligent room sensor.

2.6 SENSORS AND MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Temperature Sensors



1. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory-calibrated to within 0.5°F, totally interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Wall sensors to be installed as indicated on drawings. Mount 48 inches about finished floor. Duct sensors to be installed such that the sensing element is in the main air stream. Immersion sensors to be installed in wells provided by control contractor, but installed by mechanical contractor. Immersion wells shall be filled with thermal compound before installation of immersion sensors. Outside air sensors shall be installed away from exhaust or relief vents, not in an outside air intake and in a location that is in the shade most of the day.

B. Intelligent Room Sensor with LCD Readout

1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall allow occupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use—all within limits as programmed by building operator. Sensor shall also allow service technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation.

2. The Intelligent Room Sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room temperature, outside temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This unit shall be programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility to configure the display to match their application. The site developer should be able to program the unit to display time-of-day, room humidity and outdoor humidity. Unit must have the capability to show temperatures in Fahrenheit or Centigrade.

3. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time count down shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by occupant from the sensor. Time remaining shall be displayed. Display shall show the word “OFF” in unoccupied mode unless a function button is pressed.

4. See sequence of operation for specific operation of LCD displays and function keys in field service mode and in normal occupant mode. Provide intelligent room sensors as specified in point list.

5. Field service mode shall be customizable to fit different applications. If intelligent room sensor is connected to VAV controller, VAV box shall be balanced and all air flow parameters shall be viewed and set from the intelligent room sensor with no computer or other field service tool needed.

C. Wall Sensor

1. Standard wall sensor shall use solid-state sensor identical to intelligent room sensor and shall be packaged in aesthetically pleasing enclosure. Sensor shall provide override function, warmer/cooler lever for set point adjustment and port for plug-in of Field Service Tool for field adjustments. Override time shall be stored in controller and be adjustable on a zone-by-zone basis. Adjustment range for warmer/cooler lever shall also be stored in EEPROM on controller. All programmable variables shall be available to Field Service Tool through wall sensor port.

D. LCD Operator Terminal

1. The LCD operator terminal is a small wall- or panel-mounted operator terminal that connects directly to the BACnet LAN. The communication design and messaging structure shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet. Each operator



terminal shall be able to display any BACnet object from anywhere in the BACnet network.

2. Each of these operator’s terminals shall have a keypad and an adjustable backlit LCD, with a simple menu structure to give occupants and technicians intuitive access to system information. It shall have a minimum 4-line by 20-character display to allow an operator to query and adjust system values.

3. The system shall allow the connection of up to 16 LCD operator terminals to each Building Controller. The operator shall have the ability to connect to each of these operator terminals with a laptop computer via an RS-232 cable to gain system access, troubleshooting, and display programming.

4. Provide LCD operator terminals in the locations shown on the drawings.

E. Field Service Tool

1. Field service tool shall allow technician to view and modify all setpoints and tuning parameters stored in application controller. In addition, technician shall be able to view status of all inputs and outputs on digital readout. Each piece of data shall have a data code associated with it that is customizable.

2. Field service tool shall plug into wall sensor and provide all the functionality specified. Operator workstation shall include the capability to disable operation of the field service tool.

3. Provide XX Field Service Tools for this project.

F. Network Connection Tool

1. Network connection tool shall allow technician to connect a laptop to any MS/TP network or at any MS/TP device and view and modify all information throughout the entire BACnet network. Laptop connection to tool shall be via Ethernet or PTP.

2. Provide quick connect to MS/TP LAN at each controller. Tool shall be able to adjust to all MS/TP baud rates specified in the BACnet standard.

3. Proved XX Network Connection Tools for this project.

2.7 ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS

A. Quality Assurance for Actuators

1. UL Listed Standard 873 and C.S.A. Class 4813 02 certified.

2. NEMA 2 rated enclosures for inside mounting, provide with weather shield for outside mounting.

3. Five-year manufacturers warranty. Two-year unconditional and three-year product defect from date of installation.

B. Execution Details for Actuators

1. Furnish a Freeze-stat and install “Hard Wire” interlock to disconnect the mechanical



spring return actuator power circuit for fail-safe operation. Use of the control signal to drive the actuators closed is not acceptable.

2. Each DDC analog output point shall have an actuator feedback signal, independent of control signal, wired and terminated in the control panel for true position information and troubleshooting. Or the actuator feedback signal may be wired to the DDC as an analog input for true actuator position status.

C. Actuators for Damper shall be Electric unless otherwise specified, provide actuators as follows:

1. UL Listed Standard 873 and Canadian Standards association Class 481302 shall certify Actuators.

2. NEMA 2 rated actuator enclosures are. Use additional weather shield to protect actuator when mounted outside.

3. 5 year Manufacturers Warranty. Two-year unconditional + Three year product defect from date of installation.

4. Mechanical spring shall be provided when specified. Capacitors or other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable.

5. Position indicator device shall be installed and made visible to the exposed side of the Actuator. For damper short shaft mounting, a separate indicator shall be provided to the exposed side of the Actuator.

6. Overload Protection: Actuators shall provide protection against actuator burnout by using an internal current limiting circuit or digital motor rotation sensing circuit. Circuit shall insure that actuators cannot burn out due to stalled damper or mechanical and electrical paralleling.

7. Modulating actuators shall be 24Vac and consume 10VA power or less.

8. Conduit connectors are required when specified and when code requires it.

D. Damper Actuators:

1. Outside Air and Exhaust Air Damper Actuators shall be Mechanical Spring Return. Capacitors or other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the damper as required.

2. Economizer Actuators shall utilize Analog control 2-10 VDC, Floating control is not acceptable.

3. Electric damper actuators shall be direct shaft mounted and use a V-bolt and toothed V-clamp causing a cold weld effect for positive gripping. Single bolt or setscrew type fasteners are not acceptable.

4. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per damper section. No connecting rods or jackshafts shall be needed. Small outside air and return air economizer dampers may be mechanically linked together if one actuator has sufficient torque to drive both and damper drive shafts are both horizontal installed.



5. Multi-section dampers with electric actuators shall be arranged so that each damper section operates individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per damper section. (See below execution section for more installation details.)

E. Control Dampers. The sheet metal contractor shall furnish and size all automatic control dampers unless provided with packaged equipment. The sheet metal contractor shall install all dampers unless provided with packaged equipment.

1. All dampers used for modulating service shall be opposed blade type arrange for normally open or normally closed operation as required. The damper is to be sized so that when wide open the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure drop for effective throttling.

2. All dampers used for two-position or open-close control shall be parallel blade type arranged for normally open or closed operation as required.

3. Damper linkage hardware shall be constructed of aluminum or corrosion resistant zinc & nickel-plated steel and furnished as follows:

4. Bearing support bracket and drive blade pin extension shall be provided for each damper section. Sheet metal contractor shall install bearing support bracket and drive blade pin extension. Sheet metal contractor shall provide permanent indication of blade position by scratching or marking the visible end of the drive blade pin extension.

5. Drive pin may be round only if V-bolt and toothed V-clamp is used to cause a cold weld effect for positive gripping. For Single bolt or set-screw type actuator fasteners, round damper pin shafts must be milled with at least one side flat to avoid slippage.

6. Damper manufacturer shall supply alignment plates for all multi-section dampers.

7. Actuator Mounting for Damper arrangements shall comply to the following:

a. Damper Actuators: Shall not be installed in the air stream

b. A weather shield shall be used if actuators are located outside. For Damper Actuators use clear plastic enclosure.

c. Damper actuator ambient temperature shall not exceed 122 degrees F through any combination of medium temperature or surrounding air. Appropriate air gaps, thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or insulation shall be provided as necessary

d. Actuator cords or conduit shall incorporate a drip leg if condensation is possible. Water shall not be allowed to contact actuator or internal parts. Location of conduits in temperatures dropping below dew point shall be avoided to prevent water from condensing in conduit and running into actuator.

e. Damper mounting arrangements shall comply to the following:

1. The ventilation subcontractor shall furnish and install damper channel supports and sheet metal collars.

2. No jack shafting of damper sections shall be allowed.



3. Multi-section dampers shall be arranged so that each damper section operates individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per section.

f. Size damper sections based on actuator manufacturers specific recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. In general:

1. Damper section shall not exceed 24 ft-sq. with face velocity £ 1500 FPM.



g. Multiple section dampers of two or more shall be arranged to allow actuators to be direct shaft mounted on the outside of the duct.

h. Multiple section dampers of three or more sections wide shall be arranged with a 3-sided vertical channel (8’’ wide by 6” deep) within the duct or fan housing and between adjacent damper sections. Vertical channel shall be anchored at the top and bottom to the fan housing or building structure for support. The sides of each damper frame shall be connected to the channels. Holes in the channel shall allow damper drive blade shafts to pass through channel for direct shaft mounting of actuators. Open side of channel shall be faced down stream of the airflow, except for exhaust air dampers.

i. Multiple section dampers to be mounted flush within a wall or housing opening shall receive either vertical channel supports as descried above or sheet metal standout collars. Sheet metal collars (12” minimum) shall bring each damper section out of the wall to allow direct shaft mounting of the actuator on the side of the collar.

2.8 ENCLOSURES

A. All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures.

B. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment.

C. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors.

D. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all enclosures in any mechanical room or electrical room. Include location and unit served on nameplate. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8” thick sized appropriately to make label easy to read.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.



B. Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)


B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules.

3.3 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS

A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 48 inches above floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations from owner’s representative prior to installation.

B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.

C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels.

D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for installation under other sections—sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.

3.4 INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING

A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally, in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state and local electrical codes.

B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire for all communications trunks.

C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the owner's representative prior to rough-in.

D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.

E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings—coordinate with electrical contractor.

F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in raceways. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run with plenum rated cable (without conduit).

3.5 DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY

A. Provide all database generation.



B. Displays

1. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system. They shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles.

C. Run Time Totalization

1. At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps. Warning limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes.

D. Trendlog

1. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be automatically trended.

E. Alarm

1. All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner's requirements.

F. Database Save

1. Provide back-up database for all stand-alone application controllers on disk.

3.6 FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section.

B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.

C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at control contractor's local or main office. At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or as specified.

D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to maintaining the integrity of the operating system.

3.7 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED

A. Provide final control schematics and drawings indicating location of all control devices and final points list.

3.8 TRAINING

A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment.

B. Provide system operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons.

C. Provide on-site training above as required, up to 16 hours as part of this contract.



D. Provide tuition for at least one individual for a one-week factory training class. If applicable, costs for travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the Owner.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 220000.

B. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative.

C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper operation.

PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Provide a complete and operational temperature control and building automation system based on the following points and sequence of operation. The system shall be complete as to sequences and standard control practices. The determined point list is the minimum amount of points that are to be provided. If additional points are required to meet the sequence of operation, they will be provided.

B. BACnet Object List

1. The following points as defined for each piece of equipment are designated as follows:

a. Binary Out (BO) - Defined as any two-state output (start/stop) (enable/disable), etc.

b. Binary In (BI) - Defined as any two-state input (alarm, status), etc.

c. Analog In (AI) - Defined as any variable input (temperature) (position), etc.

d. Analog Out (AO) - Defined as any electrical variable output. 0–20mA, 4–20mA and 0–10VDC are the only acceptable analog outputs. The driver for analog outputs must come from both hardware and software resident in the controllers. Transducers will not be acceptable under any circumstance.



HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 1

SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING


A. Pipe and pipe fittings for:

1. Heating water piping system.

2. Equipment drains and overflows.

B. Valves:

1. Ball valves. 2. Butterfly valves. 3. Check valves.


A. Specification Section for Painting.

B. Specification Section for Piping Expansion Compensation.

C. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

D. Specification Section for Piping Insulation.

E. Specification Sections for Hydronic Specialties.

F. Specification Section for Chemical Water Treatment Pipe Cleaning. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brasing Operators.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 50 and 300.

C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. F. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless.

G. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and

Elevated Temperatures.



H. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

I. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.

J. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

K. ASTM F845 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polybutylene (PB) Tubing.

L. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

M. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

N. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.

O. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

P. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

Q. ASTM A-47 – Malleable Iron grooved piping coupling housing.

R. ASTM A-S36 – Ductile Iron grooved piping coupling housing.

S. ASTM D-2000 – Elastomer gasket for grooved piping couplings. 1.4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners in accessible locations.

C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus

connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.

D. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open

systems. Clear flow – No Substitutions. E. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with MSS SP69 unless indicated

otherwise.

F. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

G. Use ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

H. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hydronic heating chilled water pumps.

I. Use 3/4 inch (20mm) ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points

of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See requirements of Specification Section for submittals.

B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining

procedures. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. See requirements of Specification Section for record documents.

B. Record actual locations of valves. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. See requirements of Specification Section for operation and maintenance data.

B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

five years experience.

C. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME SEC 9. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9.

C. Provide certificate of compliance of qualifications from authority having jurisdiction. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Sections for delivery, storage and handling.





D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Section for extra materials. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper. 2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled

branch tube. 3. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range

430 to 535 degrees F (220 to 280 degrees C). Grooved fittings with EPDM Grade E gasket for service temperature range of -40°F to 230°F.

2.2 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black.

1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.

2. Joints: Threaded or AWS D1.1 welded, grooved fittings with EPDM Grade E

gasket for service temperature range of -40°F to 230°F. 2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. See Specification Section for Hanger and Supports. 2.5 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under:

1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches (50 mm):



1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) forged steel, slip-on. 2. Copper Piping: Bronze. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene.

C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:

1. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.

2. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range

from -30degrees F. 3. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. Connections to be manufactured by Clear Flow – No Substitutions.

2.6 GATE VALVES

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal 2. Bronze body, bronze trim, bonnet, stem, inside screw, wedge disc ends.

B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal 2. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke,

solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, ends. 2.7 BALL VALVES


1. Manufacturer: Nibco or Equal. 2. Bronze two piece body, full port chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and

stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops, solder or threaded ends. 600 wg rating.


1. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal. 2. Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever

handle, flanged.



2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal

1. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends, extended neck.

2. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

3. Operator: Infinite position lever handle with memory stop.

2.9 SWING CHECK VALVES


1. Manufacturer: Nibco or Equal. 2. Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition disc,

solder or threaded ends.


1. Manufacturer: Nibco or Equal. 2. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc, renewable

disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.10 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturer: Nibco or Equal.

1. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient seal bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Related Sections.

3.2 INSTALLATION




B. Install heating water and chilled water to ASME B31.9. Install chilled water piping to ASME B31.5.

C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.

G. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.

H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment. Refer to related sections.

I. Inserts: See section on Supports and Anchors. J. Pipe Hangers and Supports: See section on Supports and Anchors. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl

spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to related Sections.

M. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

N. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to

maintain top of pipe level.

O. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

P. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting.

Refer to related Sections.

Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. END OF SECTION 23 2113


HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 2114 - 1

SECTION 23 2114 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES


A. Air vents.

B. Expansion tanks.

C. Air Separators.

D. Strainers.

E. Combination fittings.

F. Flow indicators, controls, and meters. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Plumbing Specialties.

B. Specification Section for Hydronic Piping. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 8-D-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining

procedures. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Project Record Documents.

B. Record actual locations of flow controls. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Operation and Maintenance Data.



B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section for Delivery, Storage and Handling.



D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BLADDER-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS

A. Manufacturers: TACO Model as scheduled or Equal.

B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME SEC 8-D;

supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig (860 kPa), with flexible butyl Bladder chamber in sealed into tank, and steel support stand.

C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig

(80 kPa).

D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure back flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass. Coordinate with the plumbing drawings for the provision of these items.

2.02 AIR VENTS

A. Float Type: Amtrol or Equal.

B. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.

2.03 AIR SEPARATORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Taco, Inc; 4900 (size and capacity as called for on plans)



2. Spirotherm.

B. Air and dirt removal device shall be constructed of steel. It shall be designed, fabricated and stamped per ASME Section VIII Division 1 with a maximum working pressure of 125 psi at 270°F. Manufacturer shall be holder of ASME U stamp. Manufacturer to have optional 250 psi and 150 psi ASME units available.

C. Units up to three 3-inch in size shall be provided with threaded connections as standard. Units four 4-inch and larger shall be provided with flanged system connections as standard. Inlet and outlet connections to be inline with piping system. Both inlet and outlet to be in the same horizontal and vertical planes.

D. Each air and dirt removal device shall be equipped with a brass conical shaped air venting chamber designed to minimize system fluid from fouling the venting assembly. The air vent shall be able to be closed to allow flushing and purging of dirt via side port without dirt passing through vent on initial system fill.

E. A brass flushing cock shall be located on the side of each separator to facilitate system fast-fill and removal of the floating impurities from the air system interface within the separator.

F. A blow down valve shall be provided by the unit manufacturer on the bottom of each unit to allow blow down and cleaning. On units 2 ½” and smaller the valve and all of its fittings shall be 1”. On units three 3” and larger the valve and all openings shall be 2”.

G. The air and dirt removal device shall remove air down to 18 microns and shall remove dirt/debris down to 35 microns. The unit shall be 100% efficient at removing dirt down to 90 microns in 100 passes or less.

H. The unit manufacturer shall provide the owner and design engineer third party independent test data certifying that their unit performs to the above standards. Suppliers not providing these independent performance test results will not be acceptable.

I. The air and dirt separator shall employ the use of high surface area pall rings to achieve optimal separation of air and dirt with minimal pressure drop. The pall rings shall be made of stainless steel. Stainless steel will be the only acceptable material used for suppressing turbulence and increasing surface area for high efficiency air and dirt removal. Inferior materials of construction such as copper for the straining medium will not be acceptable.

J. Manufacturer must have at least 15 years of experience with microbubble coalescing and dirt removal technology.

K. The unit shall be manufactured with a removable cover to facilitate removal, inspection, and cleaning of the pall ring basket. The entire pall ring basket shall be constructed of stainless steel. For safety and ease of service the unit shall be accessed from the top and the pall ring basket shall be accessed as one complete assembly housed in a stainless steel cage.

2.04 STRAINERS

A. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:



Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

B. Size 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm):

Flanged iron body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch (1.2 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 5 inch (125 mm) and Larger:

Flanged iron body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

2.05 PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS

A. Amtrol or Equal.

B. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) and larger, rated for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch (5 mm) diameter openings, disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream and removable for cleaning.

C. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in

side. 2.06 FLOW CONTROLS

A. Circuit Setter: Taco or Equal.

1. Manual Control Ball Valve Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet schader valve on inlet and outlet, calibrated nameplate, and memory stop.

2. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating

pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, minimum pressure 3.5 psig (24 kPa).

2.07 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled.


A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.

C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

D. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.



E. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

F. Support pump fittings with floor or ceiling mounted pipe and flange supports as deemed appropriate.

G. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.

H. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of

individual vent areas.

I. Provide minimum 6 pipe diameters (or per Manufacturers recommendation) upstream of circuit setter.



DUCTWORK 23 3113 - 1

SECTION 23 3113 - DUCTWORK


A. Metal ductwork. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Painting, Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.

B. Specification Section for Supports and Anchors, Sleeves.

C. Specification Section for Duct Insulation, External insulation.

D. Specification Section for Ductwork Accessories.

E. Specification Section for Air inlets and Outlets.

F. Specification Section for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.

B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.

C. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.

D. ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

E. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the

Hot-Dip Process.

F. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality.

G. ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and

Cold-Rolled.

H. ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.

I. AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal.

J. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.



K. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

L. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.

M. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

N. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

O. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.


A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide complete construction shop drawings for all duct systems. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration.

C. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test

pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Record Documents.

B. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.


A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B. All duct systems shall be tested for leakage in strict accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

C. Maintain one copy of document on site.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.



B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience.




A. Construct ductwork to SMACNA, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366.

C. Insulated Flexible Ducts:

1. Manufacturers:CertainTeed Certaflex or Equal. 2. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass

insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. 3. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG (2.50 kPa) positive and 1.0 inches WG (250 Pa)

negative. 4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec). 5. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F (-23 degrees C to 71 degrees

C).

D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

E. Sealant:

1. Manufacturers: Hardcast or Equal. 2. Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials;

liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. Indoor and Outdoor rated. 3. See requirement for Leakage Testing in Part 3 – Execution.

F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel; threaded both ends, or continuously threaded.

2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION



A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. Minimum duct gauge shall be 24 gauge.

B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible due to space constraints and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Contact the Engineer for approval on the use of square (in lieu of radius) fittings.

C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;

maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

D. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs constructed per SMACNA. Unless

otherwise indicated, 90 degree conical tee (spin-in with scoop and damper) connections may be used where duct dimensions facilitate the additional 2 inches required to make the connections.

E. Provide volume dampers to all Diffuser branches. The only exception to this criteria is

where the duct is located above an inaccessible ceiling type (e.g. gyp. Board), or where specifically indicated otherwise. Contact the Engineer for further guidance if there are any areas of concern.

2.3 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Round and Flat Oval Ducts:

1. Manufacturers: United McGill or Equal. 2. Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light reinforcing

corrugations; fittings manufactured of at least two gages heavier metal than duct. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Seal at all field connections and longitudinal Pittsburg joints. Note: If the leakage testing indicates leakage, (as the measured difference between fan CFM and Air Outlet Totals) in excess of those values indicated in SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual”, The Contractor shall reseal the ductwork and have it retested. If the test still indicates excessive leakage, the Contractor will be required to have leak tests performed using a positive pressure mode analysis as described in Section 3 of the SMACNA Duct Leakage Manual.



C. The Contractor shall be required to perform Leakage Testing for all duct systems.

D. Duct systems shall meet the Leakage Class indicated for the respective pressure class..

E. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions.

F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and

maintenance activities.

H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.

I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

J. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum length of insulated

flexible duct held in place with duct tape and 2 straps or clamps – one strap on the inner liner followed by duct tape and one strap on the outer liner.

K. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive duct tape and 2 straps as described

above for connection to diffusers.

L. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel (Heating and Cooling Systems) Return and Relief Galvanized Steel General Exhaust Galvanized Steel Outside Air Intake Galvanized Steel Combustion Air Galvanized Steel Fume Hood Exhaust Stainless Steel, 18 ga.



B. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS SEAL CLASS Supply (Heating and Cooling Systems) Up to 4” w.g. A Return and Relief Up to –3” w.g. A Outside Air Supply and Exhaust Shall be 2” w.g. C General Exhaust Up to –2” w.g. C END OF SECTION 23 3113


DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 1

SECTION 23 3300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES


A. Duct access doors.

B. Fire dampers.

C. Flexible duct connections.

D. Volume control dampers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Ductwork. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.

E. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers and, duct access doors.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers.



B. Record actual locations of volume dampers, and access doors. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS





A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Specification Section for Delivery and Storage.

B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.

A. Manufacturers: Greenheck.

B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches (450 x 450 mm) or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment manufacturers standard construction.

C. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage (1.5 mm)

thick galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch (150 mm) width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin.

2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Nailor Industries Model 08SH Hinged Door with Camlock Closure or Equal.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Duct access doors for the commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts shall be in accordance with NFPA 96. Manufactured access door may be used and shall be Kees KEDA-A or equal.

D. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick

fastening camlocking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch (25 mm) thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

E. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Hinged, Secure with camlocks.

Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Provide continuous hinge and two camlocks. Up to 24 x 48 Inches (600 x 1200 mm): Provide continuous hinge and two camlocks. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.

F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS



A. Manufacturers: Nailor Industries Model 0120 – Type B – Dynamic; Model 0130 – Type B- Dynamic for round or oval duct.

B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.

C. Curtain Type Dampers with Integral Sleeve (for vertical or horizontal installation):

Galvanized steel with 24 gauge interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for closure under air flow conditions as required by code. Configure with blades out of air stream.

D. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F (71 degrees C).

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: None Listed.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. D. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,

minimum density 30 oz per sq yd (1.0 kg/sq m). E. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches (75 mm) wide. F. Metal: 3 inch (75 mm) wide, 24 gage (0.6 mm thick) galvanized steel.

2.5 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.

A. Manufacturers: R&J Airtrack for Conical Spin-ins ( w/ scoop and damper), Greenheck for Multi-Blade dampers, or equal.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches (600 mm).

1. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with

continuous hinge or rod. 2. Operator: Minimum continuous 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter rod in self aligning,

universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. Provide with offset where required for insulation.

D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 12 x 30 inch (150 x 760 mm).

E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x

72 inch (200 x 1825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.



F. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches (300 mm) and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.

G. Quadrants:

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.

2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets,

bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches (750 mm) provide regulator at both ends.


A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Specification Section for Ductwork, duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where

indicated.

C. Provide duct access doors and labeling for inspection and cleaning at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch (200 x 200 mm) (or full size of duct if duct is less than 12 inches) size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch (450 x 450 mm) size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated and where ducts and outlets pass through fire

rated components. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges and in full compliance with code.

E. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.

F. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with

fans and motorized equipment.

G. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.

H. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless

of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. END OF SECTION 23 3300


EXHAUST FANS 23 3423 - 1

SECTION 23 3423 - EXHAUST FANS


A. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fan.

B. Ceiling Mounted Exhaust Fan.

C. Fume Hood Utility Set Fan. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Ductwork Insulation.

B. Specification Section for Ductwork.

C. Specification Section for Ductwork Accessories, Backdraft dampers. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.

D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

E. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

F. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

G. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

H. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.

I. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease Vapors from Commercial cooking Equipment.

J. UL 705 - Power Ventilators. K. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.


A. Specification Section for Submittals, Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide Construction and Technical data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power,



RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.


A. Specification Section for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data Warranties.

B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,

spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

C. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings

lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Greenheck or Equal. 2.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound

Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

D. Performance Base: 4,000 ft. conditions.

E. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied

areas.

F. Motor: See equipment schedule. Type: Open drip proof, continuous duty.



2.3 ROOF EXHAUST FANS

A. Manufacturer: GreenHeck Model GB or Equal.

B. Type: Centrifugal belt driven. Rated at 4,000 ft. elevation and air stream at 70°F.

C. Wheel and Inlet: The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. The fan shroud shall have a rolled bead for added strength and a birdscreen around the perimeter of the inlet.

D. Motor Construction: Motors shall be continuous duty heavy duty ball bearing type,

carefully matched to the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance and shall be UL Listed.

E. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction

box installed within the motor compartment.

F. Drives: Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.

G. A fan conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for

ease of installation.

H. Bearings: Pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed.

I. Labeling on Unit: All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air

performance.

J. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification.

K. Provide each unit with insulated roof curb and backdraft damper unless otherwise

indicated. 2.4 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS

A. Manufacturer: Greenheck Model SP-A or Equal.

B. Type: Centrifugal direct drive rated at 5,000 ft. elevation and 70°F air stream.



C. Wheel and Inlet: Forward curved, aluminum wheel, dynamically balanced. Aluminum ceiling grille.

D. Cabinet Construction: Heavy gauge galvanized steel with ½” acoustical insulation.

Aluminum backdraft damper. Coordinate with drawings for duct connection requirements. Provide inter-connecting duct, and roof jack with bird screen.

E. Motor Construction: Continuous duty motor. Motor disconnect shall be internal plug in

type. Access for wiring shall be external.

F. Labeling on Unit: Fans shall bear the AMCA Certified ratings seals for sound and air performance fans shall be UL Listed.

2.5 DIRECT DRIVE BACKWARD INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL UTILITY FANS

A. General Description:

1. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb/ft3) 2. Performance capabilities up to 5,500 cubic feet per minute (cfm) and static

pressure to 3 inches of water gauge 3. Fans are available in seven sizes with nominal wheel diameters ranging from 7

inches through 18 inches (7 - 18 unit sizes) 4. Fan type in AMCA Arrangement 4 with a single width and single inlet housing 5. Normal operating temperature up to 200 Fahrenheit (93.3 Celsius) 6. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's engraved metal

nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number B. Wheel:

1. Non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal wheel. 2. Constructed of aluminum. 3. Statically and dynamically balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05 4. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise running

tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency 5. Single thickness blades are securely riveted or welded to a heavy gauge back

plate and wheel cone.

C. Motors: 1. Motor enclosures: Open type

2. Motor to be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for

fan applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable. Examples of unacceptable motors are: Shaded Pole, Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC), Split Phase, Capacitor Start and 3 phase induction type motors. 3. Motors are permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and pre-wired to the specific voltage and phase. 4. Internal motor circuitry to convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power to operate the motor. 5. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal. 6. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.



D. Housing:

1. Discharge position specified on equipment schedule 2. Constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel, painted steel, or aluminum with air

tight lock formed seams 3. Shall be easily rotated in the field to any of the eight standard discharge positions

E. Housing Supports and Drive Frame:

1. Housing supports are constructed of heavy gauge galvanized or painted steel with formed flanges 2. Drive frame is constructed of heavy gauge galvanized or painted steel to support

the motor and provide reinforcement for the housing 3. Prepunched mounting holes for installation

F. Disconnect Switches:

1. NEMA 4X: same as NEMA 4, but corrosion resistant.

G. Options/Accessories:

a. Motorized damper. b. Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes c. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow 3. Drain Connection: a. Threaded connection b. Provided to drain moisture from the bottom of the fan housing; fan supplied without drain plug, unless specified 4. Finishes: a. Types: Epoxy Phenolic 5. Shaft Seal: a. Shaft seal is on aluminum rub ring which seals around the shaft 6. Inlet and Outlet Guards: a. Constructed of expanded metal mounted in a steel frame to provide protection for non-ducted installations 7. Isolation: Type: Neoprene/Rubber Mount a. Sized to match the weight of each fan 8. Weatherhood: a. Completely covers motor and drive compartments b. Vented to provide sufficient motor cooling c. Required to meet UL 705




A. See Specification Section 01600 for Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.

C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal

bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch (25 mm) flex between ductwork and fan while running.

D. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

E. Provide backdraft dampers on inlet or discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated. Do not

install grease exhaust systems with backdraft dampers.

F. Do not operate fans in normal operation until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

G. Install on level on roof curbs as indicated. Isolate and anchor per manufacturer’s

instructions.

H. Coordinate with electrical for routing of conduit. Do not cut fan housing to route conduit.



VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME UNITS 23 3616-1

SECTION 23 3616 – VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNITS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Single duct terminal units.

1. Variable volume.

B. Integral heating coils.

1. Hot water.

C. Integral terminal unit controls.

1. Direct digital.

1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 230900 - Controls and Instrumentation: Thermostats and control components.

B. Divisions 25 and 26 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Thermostats and control components.

1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION


A. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Connections to heating coils.

B. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties: Connections to heating coils.

C. Section 233113 - Ductwork.

D. Section 233300 - Ductwork Accessories.

E. Section 230900 - Controls and Instrumentation.

F. Section 233700 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

G. Divisions 25 and 26 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical supply to units.

1.05 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

B. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.



C. NFPA 70 - Electric Duct Heaters.

D. UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment.

E. CUL C22.2 No. 236, Heating and Cooling Equipment.

F. AHRI 880 - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standard Rating Conditions for Air Terminals

G. ASTM A 527 (Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated Galvanized).

H. A-A-1419 or F-F-310 Federal specification (filter element, Air conditioning, Viscous- impingement or Dry type, replaceable), Tested per UL 900.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication.

B. Submit product performance data indicating design air flow, minimum static pressure drop, fan operating condition.

C. Submit sound power and noise criteria (NC) values for radiated and discharge paths.

1. Single and dual duct terminal units - correction to octave band sound power value.

OCTAVE BAND 2 3 4 5 6 7

Env. Adj. -3 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1

Mineral Fiber Ceiling Tile -9 -10 -12 -14 -15 -15

Space Effect Factor -10 -11 -12 -13 -13 -14

D. Submit installation, operation and maintenance documentation.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: The company manufacturing the products specified in this section shall have a minimum of ten years experience producing products of this type.

1.08 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY

A. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with any and all changes resulting from the use of a supplier other than the listed acceptable manufacturers.

1.09 WARRANTY



A. Provide manufacturer's parts warranty for one year from unit start-up or eighteen months from unit shipment, whichever is shorter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General

1. Manufacturer shall participate in the AHRI Certification program. Unit performance data shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 880. The manufacturer shall display the AHRI Symbol on all units.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Trane, Carrier and others as prior approved.

2. Substitutions: Prior approval required as indicated under the general and/or supplemental conditions of these specifications

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Single duct terminal units.

1. Ceiling mounted primary air control terminal units for connection to a single medium pressure duct of a central air distribution system. Terminals units may be provided with controls and integral heating coils.

B. Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and airflow indicator. Label shall include unit nominal air flow, maximum factory-set air flow, minimum factory-set air flow, and coil type.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Casings: Units shall be completely factory-assembled, manufactured of corrosion protected steel, and fabricated with a minimum of 18-gauge metal on the high pressure (inlet) side of the terminal unit damper and 22-gauge metal on the low pressure (outlet) side and unit casing.

B. INSULATION - Matte Faced - The interior surface of unit casing acoustically and thermally lined with a minimum of 1”. Insulation shall meet NFPA-90A and UL 181 requirements.

C. INSULATION EDGE TREATMENT - All cut edges of insulation shall completely enclosed by metal to arrest cut fibers and prevent erosion into the airstream.

D. Assembly: Primary air control damper, airflow sensor, fans, controls and optional heating coil in single cabinet.

E. Rectangular Supply Air Outlet Connections: Rectangular outlet connections for single duct units shall be slip and drive type.



2.04 PRIMARY AIR CONTROL DAMPER ASSEMBLY

A. Locate primary air control damper assembly inside unit casing. Construct the damper assembly from extruded aluminum and/or a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel components. Maximum damper leak rate shall not exceed 1% of damper nominal CFM at 4 inch wg. differential.

B. Provide damper assembly with integral flow sensor. Flow sensor shall be provided regardless of control type. Flow sensor shall be a multi-point, averaging, ring or cross type. Bar or single point sensing type is not acceptable.

2.05 HEATING COILS

2 Row Water Coil

Factory mounted on outlet. The coil has 144 fpf plated (fins per foot). Full fin collars provided for accurate fin spacing and maximum fin-tube contact. The seamless copper tubes are mechanically expanded into the fin collars. Coils are proof tested at 450.00 psi and leak tested at 300.00 psi air pressure under water. Coil connections are sweat with left hand configuration. Right hand coil connections are optional. Coils are provided with an access for cleaning.

2.06 WIRING

Toggle Disconnect Switch

A switch, installed in a unit mounted controls enclosure, which breaks both power legs within the control box.

Control Transformer

The 50 VA transformer is factory mounted in a unit mounted controls enclosure with 7/8" knockouts to provide 24 VAC for controls.

A. Factory install and wire power line fusing, a disconnect switch and a 24 VAC transformer for control voltage Provide terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.

2.07 DIRECT DIGITAL VAV CONTROLS

A. Direct Digital Controls

1. General. Direct digital controls (DDC) and factory costs to mount, calibrate and test the system shall be the responsibility of Section 230900 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) / Building Automation System (BAS) Contractor.

2. Multi-point, multi-axis flow ring or cross sensor to be furnished and mounted by terminal unit manufacturer. Single point or flow bar sensors are not acceptable. Flow sensing device shall be capable of maintaining airflow to within +/- 5 percent of rated



unit airflow setpoint when installed with 1.5 duct diameters straight duct, of the same size as the primary airflow inlet, upstream from the unit.

B. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNIT CONTROL

1. The VAV terminal units shall be individually controlled by a DDC VAV controller per VAV terminal unit. The DDC VAV controller, damper motor, transducer and transformer shall be supplied by the BAS contractor and furnished to the terminal unit supplier. The cost to factory mount, calibrate and test the controller, transducer, transformer and actuator shall be coordinated prior to bid day and included in the BAS price.

a. To assure proper operation and control, the BAS contractor as part of this bid shall recalibrate the transducers six (6) months after acceptance of the BAS system to correct any deviations as a result of transducer drift.

2. Submit a copy of the calibration report to the Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, Test, Adjust and Balance Contractor and Owner.

3. The BAS shall perform the following VAV Terminal unit control strategies and provide the points as listed on the DDC/VAV point list and the specified monitoring and diagnostics.

a. Grouping - The BAS shall be able to group VAV boxes via keyboard commands. These groups shall make it possible for the operator to send a common command to all boxes in a group to operate in the same mode. A sample of this group report must be provided in the submittal package for approval by engineer and owner.

b. Setpoint Control - The BAS shall edit the zone space temperature setpoint of each VAV box. The zone temperature setpoint shall be operator adjustable. Individual zone setpoint and control logic shall reside at the zone level, and not be dependent upon the BAS for control. In the event of communication loss, the box will continue to control to current setpoints.

c. Cooling Valve Control - The BAS shall control the cooling air valve to a fully open, fully closed, maximum CFM, or minimum CFM position based on operator commands. The operator shall also have the capability to adjust the maximum & minimum airflow limits of the air valve through the BAS.

d. Operating Mode - The BAS shall place the box in either the occupied or unoccupied mode based on an operator adjustable time schedule. Separate heating & cooling setpoints shall be editable for each mode through the BAS. Other modes available for special applications shall include full open, full closed, maximum flow, and minimum flow.

e. Control Offset - The BAS shall be capable of offsetting the cooling or heating setpoints of one or more groups of boxes by an operator adjustable amount. This capability will allow for automatic zone setpoint changes based on system



requirements, such as demand limiting.

f. Automatic Calibration - The system shall automatically calibrate its air flow sensing & air valve position measurement system at system startup and on a scheduled basis.

g. Terminal unit status reports - For each terminal unit, the BAS shall provide an operating status summary of all unit sensed values (zone temperature, CFM, etc.), setpoints, and modes.

h. Terminal unit group report - For each group of VAV terminal units, the BAS shall report the group mode, heating and cooling airflow, average zone temperature, minimum zone temperature, and maximum zone temperature. The report shall also display for each terminal unit in the group the present temperature control setpoints and the current zone temperature.

4. Terminal box diagnostics.

a. If zone temperature sensor input fails above its high range, unit shall control at its maximum CFM setpoint. If sensor input fails below its low range, unit shall control to its minimum CFM setpoint.

b. In both cases, all heat outputs shall be disabled. a diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.

c. If flow measuring system fails, unit shall automatically convert to a pressure dependent, damper position based algorithm. Diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.

d. If zone temperature setpoint potentiometer on zone sensor fails, unit shall automatically control to programmed occupied setpoints. Diagnostic message shall be displayed upon operator inquiry.

e. If communications are lost, controller shall continue to operate in the current mode of operation. All setpoints shall be retained in nonvolatile memory. If communications are not restored within 15 minutes, unit shall automatically initiate a reset and then calibrate the flow sensor and damper position.

C. Zone Sensors

1. The zone sensor shall communicate to the VAV controllers using spread spectrum radio technology. Simple radio technology is not acceptable due to a high likelihood of interference. Line of sight communication devices are not acceptable due to space design restrictions.

2. The averaging scheme shall provide the average of the temperatures sensed by the zone sensors. The setpoints of each of the sensors shall be averaged using a scheme that weights each sensor's input. Each sensor shall be able to have a number of votes assigned to it to give it more priority in the final calculations of the setpoint required.



3. Zone sensor relocations are at the owner/engineer's discretion and can occur at anytime throughout the length of the project warranty period.

4. The zone sensor shall have the following features:

a. Zone setpoint adjustment.

b. Night setback temperature override button to provide occupied conditions during unoccupied times.

c. Night setback override cancel button to end the override condition.

d. The sensor shall have a backup sensor assigned to it in case of a failure.

e. The sensor shall be capable of being relocated with no changes to the wiring.

f. The sensor battery life shall be a minimum of 1 year. The sensor shall send an indication of low battery condition approximately one month prior to failure.

g. If a wireless zone temperature sensor fails, the UCM shall remove it from the averaging calculation and use the remaining sensors if applicable. If averaging is not implemented the UCM shall switch to the backup zone sensor. VAV controller shall send an alarm message to the building automation system. A report shall be printable that shows sensor assignments by serial number, time since the last transmission was received and the signal strength of the transmission.

2.08 TESTING / VERIFICATION

A. Factory set and check all analog electronic and pneumatic controllers to within 5% of scheduled maximum and minimum settings. Base performance on tests conducted in accordance with AHRI 880.

B. Maximum Casing Leakage: 1 percent of nominal air flow at 0.5 in wg inlet static pressure.

C. Maximum Damper Leakage: 1 percent of design air flow at 4 in wg inlet static pressure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from 100 percent of design air flow to 25 percent nominal air flow for cooling only units and 30 percent for units with heating coils.



PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION, SINGLE DUCT VAV TERMINAL UNITS WITH DDC CONTROLS

A. Single Duct VAV Terminals, Cooling Only - On a rise in space temperature, the unit will modulate to provide maximum CFM. As space temperature decreases, the box will modulate down to its minimum CFM.

B. Single Duct VAV Terminals With Reheat - On a rise in temperature above the cooling setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall modulate to its maximum CFM. As the space temperature drops below the cooling setpoint, the terminal unit shall modulate to its minimum CFM. As the space temperature continues to fall to the heating setpoint, the terminal shall modulate to its heating minimum CFM. At this point, the heat will be staged on as follows:

C. Basic Operation: Proportional Hot Water Valve Control (Normally Open Outputs) (DDC/UCM)

A voltage signal from the zone sensor indicates the zone temperature is used by the unit controller to determine an error from the set point. This error, as well as primary flow differential pressure, is used to determine damper position within minimum and maximum cooling airflow set points. As the zone temperature drops to the heating set point, primary airflow is controlled to minimum heating flow set point. A proportional hot water valve is energized and an additional heat output is available when heating is required.



AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - 1

SECTION 23 3700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS


A. Diffusers.

B. Registers/grilles.

C. Louvers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

C. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.

D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

F. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.



B. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.


AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - 2

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 See the Grilles and Diffusers Schedule on the Drawings. Meet all construction standards and

features of the specified unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Double check ceiling types for lay-in and surface mounting prior to ordering.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and OBDs on grilles and

registers unless indicated otherwise.

E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Specification Section on painting.



ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR 23 7200 - 1

SECTION 23 7200 – FRESH AIR UNIT - ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR MODULE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section.

B. The Conditions of the Contract.

C. Other applicable sections of the specifications.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Micro-Metl, Semco or equal

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ARI 210 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.

B. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

D. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.


A. Specification Section for – Submittals, Procedures for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections.

C. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions.

E. Specification Section for - Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.




A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum years experience.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and any testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Specification Section for - Material and Equipment, handling and storage.

B. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place, ready for immediate installation of units.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Specification Section for - Contract Closeout, Warranties and Bonds.

B. Provide a one year warranty to include coverage for the entire unit.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Specification Section for - Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Provide one spare set of filters for each ERV. Provide price as a line item for reference

purposes.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FRESH AIR UNIT - ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR MODULE

A. Casing: Standard panels shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel, lined with 1/2 inch thick neoprene

insulation. The housing shall be supported by a formed structural base that forms a pan to ensure weather tight construction. Lifting holes shall be provided at the unit base. Units shall have a weatherproof sheet metal roof The outdoor air intake opening shall be protected by a galvanized steel sheet metal weather hood. The exhaust air discharge shall be covered with a weather hood. The exterior of the unit shall be coated with an alkyd enamel painting system for added protection. Casing finish shall match the color of the rooftop unit.

B. Access: Access to components shall be provided through a large, tightly sealed and easily removable access panel. Access panels shall be constructed of the same materials as the unit casing and use standard hardware. The wheel cassette shall be easily removable from the unit. The roof of the unit shall also be removable for access. Energy recovery unit shall mount directly to the roof curb to minimize roof penetrations, eliminate additional ductwork and consolidate control wiring. Energy recovery unit manufacturer shall provide ERU mounting kit to insure unit integrity and manufacturer’s standard warranty.



C. Unit Configuration: The supply air inlet and exhaust air outlet must be oriented to optimize the

distance between the two air streams in order to minimize the risk of short circuiting exhaust air into the supply air intake.

D. Fans: 1. Fans shall be double width double inlet design with forward curve type wheels. The

blades shall be designed for maximum efficiency and quiet operation. Impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

2. Fans shall be driven by direct drive motors located at the fan inlet or by motors using belts and sheaves. Motors shall be standard NEMA frame with open drip-proof enclosures. V-belt drives shall be designed for a minimum 1.4 service factor.

3. Dampers: Outside air intake will require a two position damper with electronic actuator. Damper actuator shall be wired to unit power panel and will close when unit is turned off. A gravity back draft damper is required for the exhaust air discharge.

4. Total Energy Wheel: The rotor media shall be made of aluminum or equivalent material which is coated to prohibit corrosion. All surfaces shall be coated with a non-migrating adsorbent specifically developed for the selective transfer of water vapor. Verification in writing shall be presented from the desiccant manufacturer confirming that the internal pore diameter distribution inherent in the desiccant being provided limits adsorption to materials not larger than the critical diameter of a water molecule. In addition, the face of the media shall be coated with an acid resistant coating to provide maximum protection against face oxidation. Recovery efficiencies shall be clearly documented through an independent certification program. The media shall be cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water or light detergent, without degrading the latent recovery. Dry particles up to 600 microns shall freely pass through the media. Wheel media shall be independently tested and shown to conform with the requirements of NFPA-90A, documenting a flame spread of less than 25 and a smoke generation rating of less than 50.

5. Rotor Cassette: The rotor cassette shall be a sheet metal framework which limits the deflection of the rotor due to air pressure loss to less than 1/32”. The cassette shall be made of galvanized steel to prevent corrosion. The rotor cassette shall be easily removable from the Energy Recovery Unit to facilitate rigging (if necessary) and ease of service. The wheel cassette design shall use pillow block bearings for long life. A non-adjustable purge section shall be included in the cassette.

6. Filters: The filters shall be 1 or 2 inch thick disposable pleated media MERV 13 minimum type mounted in the outside air hood and in the return air plenum. The filters shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories as Class 2.

7. Wheel Frost Protection: Unit shall be equipped with an outdoor air temperature sensor and controller such that the energy recovery wheel can be operated in stop/jog mode during very low outdoor air temperature periods to prevent freezing of the wheel while still delivering outdoor air through the unit.

8. Electrical: Units shall require a single 60 cycle power connection. See schedule for voltage and phase requirements. The electrical panel shall consist of individual motor contactors, short circuit and overload protection, and control power transformer. The



NEMA 3R electrical panel shall be mounted on the unit exterior for ease of access. Unit shall be ETL listed and labeled. Provide space for mounting of disconnect by others.

9. Energy Recovery Unit shall be equipped with necessary controls to interlock with the building DDC control system. Alerton building control system interface required. An outside air flow monitoring and measuring station shall be provided on the air intake and interfaced to the Alerton control system.

10. 18” high factory Roof Curb to be provided for the unit. 11. Factory mounted Fused Disconnect Switch shall be provided for the unit. 12. Exhaust and Outside Air Intakes shall be provided with hoods and birdscreen. 13. Wheel bypass and stop jog control to stop or activate the wheel when outdoor enthalpy is

acceptable for economizer operation then activating for decontamination/cleaning.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with NFPA 90A.

B. Provide factory fabricated curb base complete and mounted level with flashings and sealing strips. Base shall have 14” high flashing.

C. The HVAC contractor shall be responsible for the correct power wiring to the ERV units. He shall instruct the Electrical Contractor as to the proper connection point, disconnect location. The HVAC Contractor shall assure proper and complete unit manufacturer’s data is available and is used for installation by the Electrical Contractor.

D. All control interlock wiring and conduit shall be furnished and installed by the HVAC/DDC Control System Contractor. Wiring inside the unit shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s wiring diagrams. Minimum wire size inside unit cabinet shall be No. 16, copper, stranded. Wiring within the unit shall be bundled and neatly trained. Terminal connections shall be properly made-up using connector devices and each connection point clearly identified as to function.

E. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to roof during installation. The curbs shall be set in place and units crane-set directly on curbs. Units shall not be rolled on the roof under any circumstances.

F. Start-up and initial adjustment of units shall be done by the manufacturer’s authorized service personnel. Written report of start-up noting any problems and/or adjustments necessary shall be submitted with final documents. Start-ups shall include a seasonal change check-up no later than six months after initial start-up.

G. When equipment other than specified is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design and installation of electrical power to equipment.





PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 23 7400 - 1

SECTION 23 7400 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Package roof top unit. B. Heat exchanger. C. Refrigeration components. D. Unit operating controls. E. Roof curb F. Electrical power connections.


A. Specification Section for Ductwork Insulation. B. Specification Section for Ductwork.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90 A & B - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. ARI 360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment testing and

rating standard. D. ANSI/ASHRAE 37 - Testing Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. E. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90 A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design Standard. F. ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 - Unitary Air Conditioning Standard for safety requir G. California Energy Commission Administrative Code - Title 20/24 - Establishes the

minimum efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in the State of California.

H. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment and Air- Source Heat Pump Equipment.

I. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. J. ARI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Equipment. K. ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 - National Electric Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit unit performance data including: capacity, nominal and operating performance. B. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction,

components and options. C. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and

services clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center of gravity. Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights including dimensions.

D. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommended wire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.

E. Shop drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of the agreement for an authorized service representative of the manufacturer for installation check, test and start up.



1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory-shipping covers in place until installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first.

B. Provide five-year extended warranty for compressors. C. Provide five-year heat exchanger limited warranty.


A. Unit shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 for construction of packaged air conditioner.

1. In the event the unit is not UL approved, the manufacturer must, at his expense, provide for a field inspection by a UL representative to verify conformance to UL standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to comply with UL, as directed by the UL representative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one set of filters for installation period and one additional set for replacement

prior to final testing, adjusting and balancing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop unit(s) as shown and scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

B. The basis of specification is Trane packaged rooftop air conditioning unit with approved alternates being Carrier, York, and Lennox. Alternates must still comply with the performance and features as specified within these specifications and indicated on the design documents.

2.2 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be combination heating/ cooling only packaged rooftop (s) as scheduled on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based on ARI Standard 210. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weather-tight casing with compressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, heating section, return-air filters, supply motors and unit controls and drives.

B. Unit(s) shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A. C. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate

caution areas. D. Units shall be convertible airflow design as manufactured. E. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification. F. Units shall be provided with disconnect switch.



2.3 UNIT CASING

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 18 gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.

B. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117.

C. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/ maintenance from one side of the unit. D. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be double-

hemmed and gasket-sealed. E. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters,

heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section.

F. Units base pan shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and return openings for water integrity.

G. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation with foil face on all exterior panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. All edges must be captured so that there is no insulation exposed in the air stream.

H. Provide 115-volt convenience outlet, factory-installed and unpowered, per NEC requirements.

I. Provide openings either on side of unit or through the base for power, control, condensate, and gas connections. Panels shall be removable without the use of tool.

J. The base of the unit shall have 3 sides for forklift provisions. The base of the units shall have rigging/lifting holes for crane maneuvering.

2.4 AIR FILTERS

A. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the unit and shall be accessible through access panels. Two (2) inch thick glass fiber disposable media filters MERV 13 shall be provided.

2.5 FANS AND MOTORS

A. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan.

B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings.

C. Provide units 3-4.5 Tons with multispeed direct driven supply fans. D. Provide units 5 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor

sheaves. E. Outdoor and Indoor Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal

overload protection. F. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in

the vertical discharge position. G. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way,

and protectively coated with lubricating oil.

2.6 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION

A. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit, UL or CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide capability for gas piping through the side of the unit.



B. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment. C. Induced draft combustion type with direct spark ignition system, redundant main gas

valve, and 2-staged heat. D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air

prior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Provide flame rollout switches. E. Induced draft blower shall have combustion air proving switches and built-in thermal

overload protection on fan motor. F. Heat Exchanger: Provide tubular section type constructed from 18-gauge aluminized

steel. G. Burners: Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of stainless steel. H. Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of

excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow.

2.7 EVAPORATOR COIL

A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil. B. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure

tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig. C. Provide factory installed thermal expansion valve (TXV) for each refrigerant circuit.

Factory pressure tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig. D. Provide a removable, reversible, cleanable double-sloped drain pan for base of evaporator

coil constructed of PVC.

2.8 CONDENSER SECTION

A. Provide internally finned seamless copper tube mechanically bonded to configured aluminum fins. Factory pressure test to 450 psig.

B. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing.

C. Provide condenser coils with louvered hall guards.

2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm. Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with winding temperature limits and compressor overloads.

B. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard. C. Provide unit with each refrigerant circuit factory-supplied completely piped with liquid

line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.

2.10 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION

A. Provide a fully integrated field-installed 100% modulating outside air economizer with unit return and powered exhaust air, minimum position setting, preset linkage, wiring harness with plug. Unit operation is through primary temperature controls that automatically modulate dampers to maintain space temperature conditions on units.

B. Provide economizer with outside air dry-bulb comparative control to govern economizer changeover.

C. Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of the unit.

D. Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or power interruption.

E. Field Installed rain hood with filter, shall provide full economizer operation, screen and



filter.

2.11 OPERATING CONTROLS

A. Provide units with a DDC room sensor mounted on wall within ventilated locking cover. B. Units shall also be provided with microprocessor unit-mounted DDC controller which

when used with an electronic zone sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shall perform all unit functions by making all heating, cooling, and ventilating decisions through resident software logic.

C. Microprocessor DDC controller will be connected to campus/school existing energy management system in future.

D. Provide factory-wired roof top units with 24 volt control circuit with control transformers, contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Units shall have single point power connections and shall include starters and factory mounted over current protection circuit breaker.

E. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor slugging by interrupting compressor operation.

F. Provide an anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in the microprocessor.

2.12 ROOF CURB

A. Contractor shall provide factory supplied sloped roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinc coated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. Ship knocked down and provided with instructions for easy assembly. Minimum 18” height. Verify correct unit/curb orientation with roof slope for proper curb installation.

B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines.

2.13 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. An addressable supply air smoke detector shall be provided where indicated in the Rooftop Air Conditioning unit schedule for units of 2,000 cfm or more.


A. Contractor shall verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Contractor shall verify that proper power supply is available.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount units on factory built roof-mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to

protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level. END OF SECTION 23 7400

Date post:	06-Jul-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times